SIMATIC 505
PROFIBUS-FMS Communications
Processor (505–CP5434–FMS)
User Manual
Order Number: PPX:505–8129–1
Text Assembly Number: 2807479–0001
Original Edition
!
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
DANGER is limited to the most extreme situations.
!
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury, and/or property damage.
!
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury, and/or damage to property.
CAUTION is also used for property-damage-only accidents.
Trademarks
Siemens, SIMATIC, S5, S7, and SINEC are trademarks of Siemens AG.
Series 505, PCS, SoftShop, and TISOFT are trademarks of Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
IBM is a registered trademark and PC/XT is a trademark of International Businness Machines Corporation.
Windows 95 and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corportation.
CSA is a registered trademark of Canadian Standards Association.
All other product names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners. They are used without representation as to their
release for general use.
Copyright 1997 by Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
All Rights Reserved — Printed in USA
Reproduction, transmission, or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express consent of
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
Since Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc., does not possess full access to data concerning all of the uses and applications of
customer’s products, we do not assume responsibility either for customer product design or for any infringements of patents or rights
of others which may result from our assistance.
MANUAL PUBLICATION HISTORY
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications Processor User Manual
Order Manual Number: PPX:505–8129–1
Refer to this history in all correspondence and/or discussion about this manual.
Event
Date
Description
Original Issue
12/97
Original Issue (2807479–0001)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages
Cover/Copyright
History/Effective Pages
iii — xiv
1-1 — 1-10
2-1 — 2-12
3-1 — 3-13
4-1 — 4-13
5-1 — 5-43
6-1 — 6-39
7-1 — 7-8
A-1 — A-18
B-1 — B-7
C-1 — C-2
Index-1 — Index-4
Registration
Description
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Original
Pages
Description
Contents
Preface
Chapter 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
The SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Services Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Bezel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RUN/STOP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESET Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS-FMS Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
Network Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
The PROFIBUS Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSI 7 Layer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masters and Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Token Passing on a PROFIBUS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-9
Chapter 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Overview
Installing the Module
Overview of Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Flow of Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-3
2-3
Setting the Baud Rate for the RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Setting the Jumper on Header E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Header E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-4
Inserting the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Inserting the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Connecting a Programming Device to the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Connecting to the RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-6
Connecting the FMS CP Module to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
PROFIBUS-FMS Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-7
Contents
iii
2.6
Powering Up the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Supplying Power to the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status after Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status in Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
2-8
2-9
2.7
Configuring the I/O Address in the Programmable Logic Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
2.8
PROFIBUS Network Card and Software Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Chapter 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
PROFIBUS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Bus Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-3
3-4
Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Routing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under-Floor Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Ceiling Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface Duct Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
Installing PROFIBUS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Media Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Line Length Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing PROFIBUS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination and Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Termination Selection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Connector Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a PROFIBUS Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
Chapter 4
4.1
4.2
iv
Connecting the Network
Communication Services
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Communication Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Modes of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink II Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication between the PLC and the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
Addressing on Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Multiplexed Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-7
4-7
Contents
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
FMS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Communication Job Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Access Rights to Variables in FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-10
Send-Receive Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-11
Peerlink II Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Transmitting and Receiving Peer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-12
S7 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
S7 Services Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Chapter 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Using the COM5434 Configurator
Installing the Software for the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Software Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring PC-to-FMS CP Module Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring PROFIBUS Card Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
Features and Functions of the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Screen Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Commands of the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drag-and-Drop Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Mouse Button Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
Describing the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Entering a Title for Your Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Defining the Module Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
What Is the Module Local Configuration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Module Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
5-13
Defining Peerlink II Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16
Peerlink II Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining a Peer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16
5-17
Defining FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19
FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19
5-20
Contents
v
5.7
Defining FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FDL Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
5-24
5.8
Overview of Communication Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
5.9
Configuring FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27
FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27
5-28
Configuring Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30
Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining a Send-Receive Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30
5-31
Creating FMS Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33
FMS Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a User Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33
5-34
Creating FMS Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36
FMS Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36
5-37
Saving and Downloading the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-41
Validating and Saving the Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading the Configuration to the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-41
5-42
5-42
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Chapter 6
Configuration Examples
6.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6.2
Example of an FMS Read Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Configuration Tasks for an FMS Read Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Module Local Configuration for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Connection for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the FMS Read Job for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Connection for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Variable for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example RLL Code for FMS Read Job at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-12
6-12
vi
Contents
6.3
6.4
Example of a Send-Receive Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Configuration Tasks for a Send-Receive Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FDL Connection for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Send Job for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FDL Connection for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Receive Job for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example RLL Code for Send Job at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example RLL Code for Receive Job at Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Successful Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsuccessful Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-19
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-26
6-27
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Configuration Tasks for a Peerlink II Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Transmit Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Receive Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Transmit Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Receive Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-33
6-33
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-38
6-39
6-39
Chapter 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Diagnostics
CP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
Viewing the Status of the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Status Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling CP Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-2
Active Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
Viewing the List of Active Stations on the Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
PROFIBUS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Viewing the PROFIBUS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7-4
FMS Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
Viewing the Status of FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
7-5
Contents
vii
7.5
7.6
7.7
FDL Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Viewing the Status of FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
Viewing the Status of FMS and Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7-7
Peer Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Viewing the Status of Peer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Appendix A
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
Reference Data
Data Element List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
SIMATIC 505 Data Types and S7 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Data Access between SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC 505 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
SIMATIC 505 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMATIC S7 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using S7 Addressing to Specify 505 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-7
Mapping of FMS Variables onto 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Simple Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of FMS Status Response in 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of FMS Identify Response in 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.5
FMS Connection Types and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
FMS Connection Types and Possible Job Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Configuring Read/Write Access to Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.6
Local LSAP Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Appendix B
Troubleshooting
B.1
Using the RESET Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B.2
Job Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
Job Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locally Detected Errors in FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Errors Signaled by the FMS Partner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Job Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
B-3
B-5
B-6
CP-to-Controller Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7
B.3
Appendix C
viii
Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
List of Figures
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
Example of Devices on an FMS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The 505-CP5434-FMS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The OSI 7 Layer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Token Passing on a PROFIBUS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplified Physical View of a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Connection between Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical View of a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1-4
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Installation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of Header E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumper Storage at 9600 Baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting the Module into the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Port Cable Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Your Computer to the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS-FMS Port Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample I/O Module Definition Chart in TISOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-11
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
PROFIBUS Twisted-Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Bus Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample System Layout for PROFIBUS-FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminate the Network at the Endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Siemens Connector, External Termination Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9600 baud to 12 Mbaud Connector Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical PROFIBUS Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stripping the Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching Connector and Selecting Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-7
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
Communication between the PLC and the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplexed Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Addressing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Communication Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access to Variables via Passwords and Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Communication Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink II Services Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S7 Services Supported as a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-7
4-7
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
Installing the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC-to-Module Serial Port Setup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Connection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM5434 Configurator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Mouse Button Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-11
5-12
Contents
ix
List of Figures (continued)
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
Module Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink II Services Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining a Peer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Memory Type Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Connections Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Access Group Rights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Services Supported Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDL Connections Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Jobs Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Memory Type Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Memory Type Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Data Types Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a User Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Data Type Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Variables Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining FMS Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Memory Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Variable Access Rights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Variable Access Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Your Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-41
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
Example Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Flow for FMS Read Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Local Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Read Job Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save As Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Read Job Relay Ladder Logic for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Job Data Flow Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Local Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDL Connection for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send Job for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-11
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
x
Contents
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
Send Relay Ladder Logic for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive Relay Ladder Logic for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Successful Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsuccessful Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink Data Block Transfer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Configuration File Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Local Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink Service Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink II Services Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Configuration File for Station 5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Local Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink Service Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink II Transmit Service Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink II Services Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save As Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
Read CP Status Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Active Stations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Statistics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Configured FMS Connections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Configured FDL Connections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Configured FMS/Send-Receive Jobs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Configured Peer Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
SIMATIC 505 to S7 Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of Simple Variables in 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of Variable Arrays in 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of a Structure in 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of FMS Status Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of FMS Identify Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7
A-8
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
Contents
xi
List of Tables
1-1
PROFIBUS Physical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
2-1
2-2
LED Status Diagnostic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Network Card/Software Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
2-12
3-1
3-2
PROFIBUS Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Line Length Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
3-8
4-1
Service Modes of the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
5-1
5-2
Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
5-10
6-1
6-2
Description of Send Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of Receive Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
6-24
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
Data Element List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Address Formats for SIMATIC 505 and S7 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Status Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICS Part 1: Implementation in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICS Part 2: Supported Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICS Part 3: FMS Parameters and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICS Part 4: Local Implementation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Connection Types and Jobs Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read/Write Access to Variables with Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local LSAP Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
A-6
A-12
A-14
A-14
A-15
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
FMS or Send-Receive Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local FMS Job Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Errors Signaled by the FMS Partner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Job Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-to-Attached Controller Error Codes for FMS and Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
B-3
B-5
B-6
B-7
C-1
C-2
C-3
Communication Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Variable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C-1
C-2
xii
Contents
Preface
About This Manual
This manual describes the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications
Processor module for the Series 505 programmable logic controller system.
This manual also describes the COM5434 Configurator software package,
which you use to create configuration files for the FMS CP module.
The SIMATIC 505–CP5434–FMS Communications Processor module
(referred to throughout this manual as the FMS CP module) provides an
interface between the Series 505 family of programmable logic controllers
and Send-Receive products, S7 products, S5 products, and other Siemens
products (and third-party products), all of which can communicate over a
common hardware network.
The following topics are covered in this manual:
Related Manuals
•
PROFIBUS network features and physical characteristics
•
FMS CP module features
•
Hardware installation
•
Cabling for a PROFIBUS network
•
FMS CP module network communications overview
•
Installation and configuration of the COM5434 Configurator software
•
Communication examples
•
Troubleshooting information
Additional manuals you may need to consult include the following:
•
The system manual(s) for your controller(s)
•
The SIMATIC 505 TISOFT2 Release 6.3 User Manual,
PPX:TS505–8101–7 or higher. This manual covers programming over
PROFIBUS-FMS networks.
•
The SIMATIC 505 SoftShop for Windows Release 2.0 User Manual,
PPX:SS505–8101–3 or higher. This manual covers programming over
PROFIBUS-FMS networks.
•
The SIMATIC S5 ET 200 Distributed I/O System Manual,
PPX:505–8206–x, describes the installation and use of the Siemens
family of PROFIBUS-DP compatible ET 200 I/O modules. This manual
includes a description of the COM PROFIBUS software.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Preface
xiii
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:
•
“Click” means to place the mouse cursor on an object and quickly press
and release the mouse button. In most cases, only the left mouse button
is used.
•
“Double-click” means to place the mouse cursor on an object and
quickly press and release the left mouse button twice.
Agency Approvals
Agency approvals for the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications
Processor module are listed in Appendix C.
PROFIBUS User
Organization
PROFIBUS user organizations exist in a number of countries to allow
PROFIBUS users to exchange information. The address of the organization
in the U.S.A. is as follows:
PROFIBUS Trade Organization
Michael Bryant
5010 East Shea Boulevard, Suite C-226
Scottsdale, AZ 85254
Telephone: (602) 483-2456
Fax: (602) 483-7202
Technical
Assistance
For technical assistance, contact your Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.,
distributor or sales office. If you need assistance in contacting your
distributor or sales office, call 800-964-4114 in the U.S.A.
For additional technical assistance, call the Siemens Technical Services
Group in Johnson City, Tennessee at 423-461-2522, or contact them by
e-mail at simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com. For technical assistance
outside the United States, call 49-911-895-7000.
You can also find information about Siemens automation products at our
website at http://www.aut.sea.siemens.com.
xiv
Preface
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Chapter 1
Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
The SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Services Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Bezel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RUN/STOP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESET Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS-FMS Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
Network Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
The PROFIBUS Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSI 7 Layer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masters and Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Token Passing on a PROFIBUS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-9
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Overview
1-1
1.1
The SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications Processor Module
The SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications Processor
module (PPX:505-CP5434-FMS) provides an interface for 505-to-505
communications, and between Series 505 programmable logic controllers
and Send-Receive products (such as S5), S7 products, and third-party and
other Siemens products, all of which can communicate over a common
hardware network.
The FMS CP module conforms to the PROFIBUS standard as described in
EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. PROFIBUS-Fieldbus Message
Specification (FMS) enables object-oriented data exchange between master
stations.
Features
The FMS CP is a single-wide Series 505 module with the following features:
•
Can be installed in a local or remote Series 505 base. (The remote base
installation currently can use only the 505 remote I/O channel.)
•
Has two ports: an RS-485 PROFIBUS port and an RS-232 port.
•
Conforms to PROFIBUS-FMS protocol.
•
Operates on a PROFIBUS network (cabling medium).
•
Is configured for the network using the included COM5434
Configurator software.
•
In SoftShop or TISOFT, the FMS CP is logged in as a 4WX/4WY
Special Function (SF) module.
•
The module firmware can be upgraded in the field using flash memory.
•
Supports the following PROFIBUS cards for personal computers:
CP 5412 (A2) ISA card, (PC AT, short slot)
CP 5511 PCMCIA card (for notebook PCs)
CP 5611 PCI card
Communication
Services Supported
1-2
Overview
The FMS CP module supports the following communication services:
•
Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS); used for SIMATIC 505, S7, or
any third-party device that supports FMS protocol.
•
Send-Receive Interface (data transmission on a Fieldbus Data Link
connection); used for devices such as SIMATIC S5 stations.
•
Peerlink II (global broadcast); for 505-to-505 communications only.
•
S7 Services (server only)
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Compatibility
The SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communications Processor module is
compatible with all SIMATIC 545, 555, 565, and 575 CPUs.
System Layout
Any compatible programmable logic controllers or field devices equipped
with a PROFIBUS-FMS interface can participate on the network.
Figure 1-1 shows some examples of devices that can be used on your
network.
Personal computer with
COM5434 Configurator
software and CP 5412,
CP 5511, or CP 5611 card
SIMATIC 545
SIMATIC 555
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC 560/565
SIMATIC S7-300
R
B
C
Third-Party
Station
SIMATIC 575
Repeater
Figure 1-1 Example of Devices on an FMS Network
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Overview
1-3
1.2
Hardware Overview
Bezel Features
As shown in Figure 1-2, the bezel of the FMS CP module has four status
LEDs, a recessed RUN/STOP switch, a recessed RESET button, an RS-232
port, and an RS-485 PROFIBUS-FMS port.
PROFIBUS
FMS COMM
PROCESSOR
MOD GOOD
RUN
STOP
FAULT
RUN
STOP
RESET
RS232
PROFIBUS
FMS
505-CP5434
-FMS
Figure 1-2 The 505-CP5434-FMS Module
Status LED
Indicators
The bezel has the following status LEDs:
•
MOD GOOD
•
RUN
•
STOP
•
FAULT
The functions of the LEDs are described in Section 2.6.
1-4
Overview
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
RUN/STOP Switch
Below the LEDs is a recessed RUN/STOP toggle switch. The switch can be
moved from one position to another using a small tool, such as a
screwdriver. The switch is recessed to prevent accidental switching of the
module from one state to another.
RESET Button
The RESET button is recessed to prevent accidental reset of the module.
When the RESET button is pushed, the module resets as if power were
turned off and then turned on. Therefore, if the RUN/STOP switch is in the
RUN position and the module is functioning properly, the module begins to
transmit and receive communications after going through a normal
power-on start-up sequence.
!
WARNING
The RESET button is for the unusual circumstance in which there is a module
function error that cannot be fixed with the COM5434 Configurator software.
When the RESET button is pushed, the module enters the state of global reset,
which is the same as a power-up. The hardware is reset, all communication is
terminated on all ports, and the LEDs turn off.
Because all communication that is controlled by the module is terminated,
essential messages to other nodes that control I/O functions can be disrupted.
Disrupting communication during plant operation could result in damage to
equipment and/or injury or death to personnel.
To avoid possible damage to equipment and/or injury or death to personnel, do
not reset the module without first understanding all possible results based on
the setup of your network.
RS-232 Port
The RS-232 port is a 9-pin male D-shell connector. You can set the RS-232
port to 9600 baud, 19200 baud, or 38400 baud using a jumper on the board.
The baud rate of the port must be set before the FMS CP module is installed
in the base. See Section 2.2 for instructions on how to set the baud rate of
the port.
PROFIBUS-FMS Port
The RS-485 PROFIBUS-FMS port is a 9-pin female D-shell connector. You
set the baud rate for the PROFIBUS port during network configuration
using the COM5434 Configurator, as decribed in Section 5.4.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Overview
1-5
1.3
Network Overview
The PROFIBUS
Standard
The Process Field Bus (PROFIBUS) standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS) defines the physical and logical parameters of a bit-serial bus
network. PROFIBUS offers an interface for high-speed communications
with field devices, as well as exchange of complex data between master
stations. One objective of the standard is to create an open system that
enables networking of programmable logic controllers and field devices from
different vendors. This allows you to include in your system any device from
another vendor as long as the device conforms to the standard.
While PROFIBUS includes FMS and DP protocols, there is a universal set
of standard physical parameters for PROFIBUS networks, as listed in
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 PROFIBUS Physical Parameters
Features
Access mode
Token passing with underlying master/slave
Transmission rate
9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Transmission medium
1-6
Overview
Parameters
Electrical network: shielded two-wire cable
Optical network: fiber-optic cable (glass or plastic)
Maximum number of devices
per segment
32 (including repeater)
Maximum number of station
addresses per network
126 (not including repeaters)
Maximum cable length per
network
10 km for copper cable; more for fiber-optic cable
(see Siemens SIMATIC NET Industrial
Communications Networks, Catalog IK 10).
Topology
Electrical network: line, tree
Optical network: ring, line, star
Protocols
PROFIBUS-FMS
PROFIBUS-DP
Data size that can be
transmitted in one message
1 to 244 bytes
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
OSI 7 Layer Model
The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) 7 Layer Model defines levels of
communication from the physical layer to the logical layer. While the model
gives functions to the protocols, it does not define the protocols themselves.
PROFIBUS-FMS uses layer 1, layer 2, and layer 7. The OSI 7 Layer Model
is shown in Figure 1-3.
The Layers
PROFIBUS-FMS
7b
FMS (Fieldbus Message Specification)
7a
LLI (Lower Layer Interface)
Application layer
Presentation layer
6
Session layer
5
Transport layer
4
Network layer
3
Data link layer
2
FDL (Fieldbus Data Link)
Physical layer
1
RS-485
Empty
Figure 1-3 The OSI 7 Layer Model
Masters and Slaves
Devices on a PROFIBUS network are defined as either masters or slaves.
Masters are able to issue network commands without remote request when
they have the right to access the network. This right is based on the token,
which is discussed below. Slaves are devices on the network that do not
receive the token, and therefore have no right to issue network commands.
Slaves may only acknowledge received messages, or transmit messages in
response to a master’s request.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Overview
1-7
Network Overview (continued)
Token Passing on a
PROFIBUS Network
PROFIBUS allows for multiple masters on a single network, where each
master can control the transmission of commands by holding a token. The
token is a special telegram that transfers the right of transmission from one
master to another. It is circulated among all active masters on a network in
a token ring.
When a network is powered up, each master enters a listening mode, checks
network traffic and builds a list of active stations on the network. This
establishes the token ring for the network. When the first master (lowest
station number) finishes its listening mode, it passes itself the token, and
gains control of the network. Possession of the token indicates the ability to
initiate data transfer. Before each subsequent token pass, the master
performs a gap update, polling a single sequential station address to see if
another master is waiting to enter the network.
When a second master enters the network, the first master passes it the
token, thereby passing control of the network. In this way, control of the
network and therefore the ability to issue network commands rotates from
master to master.
Figure 1-4 shows an example of token passing among masters on a
PROFIBUS network.
1
2
Master
Master
6
Slave
3
Master
5
4
Slave
Slave
Stations 4, 5, and 6 are not part of the token ring
and cannot initiate jobs on the network.
Figure 1-4 Token Passing on a PROFIBUS Network
1-8
Overview
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Network
Communication
Communication on the PROFIBUS network can be described from both the
physical and the logical point of view.
The physical view, as shown in Figure 1-5, describes a number of stations
connected to a central bus line. This view emphasizes the actual physical
layout of the network cables and devices that enable the stations to
communicate with each other.
Figure 1-5 Simplified Physical View of a Network
The logical view describes how communication on a PROFIBUS network
takes place through logical connections between station pairs. A logical
connection relationship consists of four parts:
Local station address
Remote station address
Local LSAP (Link Service Access Point)
Remote LSAP
For each station in the connection, the local values must be equal to the
remote values of the other station, as shown in Figure 1-6. On any station, a
local LSAP can be used for only one connection (except for FMS slaves).
Station 4
Station 5
Local Address = 4
Local Address = 5
Remote Address = 5
Remote Address = 4
Local LSAP = 7
Local LSAP = 8
Remote LSAP = 8
Remote LSAP = 7
Figure 1-6 Example Connection between Stations
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Overview
1-9
Network Overview (continued)
Figure 1-7 shows how three stations on a network are configured to
communicate. The arrows represent logical connections between the
stations on the network.
Connection 1 Remote Addr = 5
LSAPs Local = 7, Remote = 8
Example of logical connection relationships
between SIMATIC 505, S7, and S5 stations
Connection 1 Remote Addr = 4
LSAPs Local = 9, Remote = 9
Connection 2 Remote Addr = 5
LSAPs Local = 9, Remote = 9
Connection 2 Remote Addr = 4
LSAPs Local = 8, Remote = 7
Connection 3 Remote Addr = 6
LSAPs Local = 10, Remote = 10
Connection 3 Remote Addr = 6
LSAPs Local = 11, Remote = 12
Address 4
505-CP5434 FMS CP
Connection 1 Remote Addr = 4
LSAPs Local = 10, Remote = 10
Address 5
S7 CP443-5
Connection 2 Remote Addr = 5
LSAPs Local = 12, Remote = 11
Address 6
S5 CP5431
Figure 1-7 Logical View of a Network
1-10
Overview
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Chapter 2
Installing the Module
2.1
Overview of Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Flow of Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-3
2-3
Setting the Baud Rate for the RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Setting the Jumper on Header E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Header E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-4
Inserting the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Inserting the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Connecting a Programming Device to the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Connecting to the RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-6
Connecting the FMS CP Module to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
PROFIBUS-FMS Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-7
Powering Up the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Supplying Power to the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status after Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status in Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
2-8
2-9
2.7
Configuring the I/O Address in the Programmable Logic Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
2.8
PROFIBUS Network Card and Software Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Installing the Module
2-1
2.1
Overview of Installation
Flow of Tasks
Follow the flow of tasks shown in Figure 2-1 when installing the FMS CP
module.
Check the baud rate setting of the jumper on header E1.
Turn off power to the base.
Insert the FMS CP module into any available I/O slot in the base.
Cable your programming device to the FMS CP module using the RS-232 port.
Cable the FMS CP module to the PROFIBUS network using the
PROFIBUS-FMS port.
Power up the base. Check the status of the LEDs.
Configure the I/O address of the FMS CP module using TISOFT
or SoftShop software.
Figure 2-1 Installation Flowchart
The following sections describe these installation tasks in detail. After these
tasks are completed, you are ready to install the COM5434 Configurator
software, as described in Section 5.1.
2-2
Installing the Module
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
!
CAUTION
Electronic equipment is sensitive to, and can be damaged by, electrostatic
discharge.
Ensure that personnel follow the precautions described below to avoid
damaging the FMS CP module by electrostatic discharge.
Handling the
Module
Visual Inspection
Integrated circuits are susceptible to damage by the discharge of static
electricity. Take the following precautions to avoid damaging the FMS CP
module by electrostatic discharge while handling:
•
Transport the FMS CP module in an anti-static container, such as the
anti-static bag in which the module was originally shipped.
•
Ensure that personnel make contact with a static-dissipative pad
and/or wear a grounded wrist strap when handling the module.
If the FMS CP module and/or the configurator software diskettes are visibly
damaged (bent or broken), contact your vendor for replacement.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Installing the Module
2-3
2.2
Setting the Baud Rate for the RS-232 Port
Setting the Jumper
on Header E1
A header labeled E1 is located on the module, as shown in Figure 2-2. The
header determines the baud rate for the RS-232 port, and the jumper must
be set before the module is installed in the base.
Bezel
E1
Jumper set on header E1 pins
at 38,400 baud.
)–19,200
)–38,400
Figure 2-2 Location of Header E1
The RS-232 port can be set at 9600 baud (no jumper), 19,200 baud, or
38,400 baud (as shown in Figure 2-2). The default setting of Header E1, as
shipped, is 38,400 baud. To set the RS-232 port at 9600 baud, the jumper
must not connect two header pins. However, in order not to lose the jumper,
the jumper should be stored on the module by hanging it on one pin only (as
shown in Figure 2-3).
Bezel
E1
Jumper shown unplugged from E1
header pins. For convenient storage,
position the jumper on one E1 pin only.
)–19,200
)–38,400
Figure 2-3 Jumper Storage at 9600 Baud
Header E2
2-4
Header E2 is shipped without a jumper, and is for factory use only. Do not
alter the state of Header E2 unless instructed to do so by a Siemens
Technical Support technician.
Installing the Module
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
2.3
Inserting the FMS CP Module
!
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard is possible if you do not turn off all power to the base
before attempting to insert the module.
Failure to turn off power to the base could result in death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Ensure that power is off in the base before attempting to insert the module.
Inserting the
FMS CP Module
The FMS CP module is a single-wide module. You can insert it into any I/O
slot in a Series 505 I/O base. Follow these steps to install the module:
1.
Turn off all power to the base and the modules.
2.
Hold the top and bottom of the bezel and slide the module into the slot,
pushing it all the way into the base. You will feel a slight increase in
resistance as the module connects with the back-plane connector.
3.
Use a flat-head screwdriver to tighten the screws at the top and bottom
of the bezel, as shown in Figure 2-4. Note the minimum torque required
in order for the bezel screws to provide electromagnetic shielding.
Minimum torque: 2.6 in-lb (0.3 N-m)
Maximum torque: 5.2 in-lb (0.6 N-m)
Backplane connectors
Figure 2-4 Inserting the Module into the Base
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Installing the Module
2-5
2.4
Connecting a Programming Device to the FMS CP Module
Connecting to the
RS-232 Port
The RS-232 port is the interface between your programming device, such as
a personal computer (PC), and the FMS CP module. Using your PC and the
RS-232 port, you can configure the module.
To connect your PC to the FMS CP module, use a standard 9-pin RS-232
cable that conforms to the pinouts shown in Figure 2-5. A standard 505
programming cable that conforms to the serial cable requirements and
pinouts is available through Siemens; specify PPX:2601094–8001.
NOTE: You can also use the RS-232 port on the FMS CP module to configure
the programmable logic controller through the backplane using applications
such as TISOFT. This feature is particularly useful if access to the RS-232
port on the CPU is limited.
Computer side
Receive data
Transmit data
Signal ground
Module side
3
2
4
1
6
5
7
8
2
3
1
6
4
5
7
8
Transmit data
Receive data
Signal ground
Shield
D-shell
Figure 2-5 RS-232 Port Cable Pinouts
Connecting the
Serial Cable
Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the appropriate 9-pin RS-232/423
serial port on your PC and the other end to the 9-pin RS-232 port on the
FMS CP module, as shown in Figure 2-6. If your computer does not have a
9-pin port, use a 25-to-9-pin converter.
Personal
computer
with
COM5434
Configurator
software
9-pin
Female
Connector
RS232
Programming Cable
(PPX:2601094–8001)
FMS CP Module
RS-232 Port
Figure 2-6 Connecting Your Computer to the FMS CP Module
2-6
Installing the Module
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
2.5
Connecting the FMS CP Module to the Network
The PROFIBUS-FMS port is the interface between the FMS CP module and
the PROFIBUS network. To connect the FMS CP module to the network,
use a standard 9-pin RS-485 cable that conforms to the pinouts shown in
Figure 2-7.
PROFIBUS-FMS Port
Pinout
Figure 2-7 shows the pinouts for the PROFIBUS-FMS port on the FMS CP.
NOTE: Pins 2 and 7 are “No Connect.” For some PROFIBUS products, these
pins are used to provide 24 VDC for powering a programming or
configuration tool. Such tools are not powered by the FMS CP module. It is
acceptable for an externally-powered PROFIBUS programming or
configuration tool to drive pins 2 and 7 to 24 VDC.
Female 9-pin D-shell connector
Pin Signal
(D-shell)
CHASSIS GND
9
5
BIAS SUPPLY GND (5)
TX/RX– (8)
TX/RX+ (3)
6
1
1
2
3*
4
5
6
7
8*
9
CHASSIS GND or NC
No Connect
TX/RX+
RTS
BIAS SUPPLY GND
BIAS SUPPLY +5V
No Connect
TX/RX–
BIAS SUPPLY GND
*For Pin 3: Terminal B on Siemens connector.
*For Pin 8: Terminal A on Siemens connector.
Figure 2-7 PROFIBUS-FMS Port Pinouts
!
CAUTION
Pin 5 (BIAS SUPPLY +5V) and Pin 6 (BIAS SUPPLY GND) on the PROFIBUS-FMS
connector are designed to support the PROFIBUS-FMS network only. These
pins have a limited output power capability of approximately 0.45 W, which
greatly exceeds the typical PROFIBUS-FMS load; nonetheless, it is possible to
overload these pins, causing internal component damage.
If the pins are overloaded, the PROFIBUS-FMS port can be rendered
non-functional, requiring the unit to be returned to the factory for repair.
Do not overload the pins on the PROFIBUS-FMS connector.
Connecting to the
Network
Connect the PROFIBUS cable connector to the PROFIBUS port on the
FMS CP module. See Section 3.3 for information on connecting PROFIBUS
cables and connectors. Standard cable connectors are available from
Siemens. See Section 3.1 for ordering information of PROFIBUS connectors.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Installing the Module
2-7
2.6
Powering Up the Base
Supplying Power to
the Base
Refer to the system manual for your programmable logic controller for
information on installing and wiring the power supply in the base. Follow
all installation guidelines and safety precautions described in your system
manual before powering up the system.
!
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard is possible if you are not fully informed about safety
precautions before you wire and/or power up the base.
Failure to follow safety guidelines could result in death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Review and comply with all warnings and proceedures in the system manual for
your base before powering up.
When you power up the base, the FMS CP module executes a diagnostic
check. The diagnostic check takes a maximum of 30 seconds.
LED Status after
Power-up
After powering up the base, observe the status of the LEDs on the bezel of
the FMS CP module. The status of the LEDs is shown in Table 2-1.
NOTE: When you power up the module for the first time, the LEDs display
as Stop With Fault. This is normal because you have not yet configured the
module’s flash memory.
Table 2-1 LED Status Diagnostic Chart
Mode of
Module
MOD GOOD
RUN
STOP
FAULT
Startup
on
Run
on
flashing
on
off
on
off
off
Stopping
on
on
flashing
off
Stop
on
off
on
off
Stop with Fault
on
off
on
on
Firmware Fault
on
off
off
on
Firmware Load
on
on
on
flashing
flashing
flashing
flashing
flashing
Fatal Error
2-8
LED Indicator
Installing the Module
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
LED Status in
Operating Modes
The operating modes of the FMS CP module, which are indicated by the
LED status, are defined below:
•
Startup: Power-up initialization is in progress.
•
Run: Normal operation.
•
Stopping: Stopping is a transition state and takes a few seconds. This
mode is selected by means of either the RUN/STOP switch or the
COM5434 Configurator. Communications are interrupted, and all
communication jobs and client/server functions are being terminated.
The module cannot be configured at this point.
•
Stop: This mode is selected by means of either the RUN/STOP switch or
the COM5434 Configurator. Communications have been interrupted,
and all communication jobs and client/server functions have been
terminated. The module can be configured at this point.
•
Stop with Fault: In this mode, the Run mode is not possible because of
incorrect configuration data. This may be due to conflicting parameters
or duplicate station addresses. Disconnect the cable while reconfiguring
the module to clear the fault condition.
•
Firmware Fault: Firmware validation has failed, and a firmware
download to the module is required.
•
Firmware Load: A firmware download to the module is in progress.
•
Fatal Error: The module failed due to defective hardware or firmware,
and may need to be replaced. First try a Reset. If pressing the Reset
button does not restore normal operation, contact your distributor.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Installing the Module
2-9
2.7
Configuring the I/O Address in the Programmable Logic Controller
After installing the FMS CP module in the base, you need to register the I/O
starting address of the FMS CP module in your programmable logic
controller memory. The module does not automatically register its I/O
address in the programmable logic controller.
NOTE: Even though the module may appear to be operating correctly, if it is
not configured in the I/O map, it cannot support communication jobs or
Peerlink transfers, and server function requests run slowly.
To configure the I/O map and verify controller-to-module communications,
connect a programming device with base configuration software (for
example, TISOFT) to the programmable logic controller, and follow the steps
below. For detailed instructions about using TISOFT to configure the I/O
slot in the base, see the SIMATIC 505 TISOFT2 Release 6.0 User Manual,
PPX:TS505–8101–6 or higher.
NOTE: Ensure that the FMS CP module successfully completes power-up
initialization before you attempt to configure the I/O slot in the base.
1.
In TISOFT, access the Configure I/O function menu.
2.
Select the appropriate channel and base number.
3.
Execute the Read Base function.
The module appears as a 4 WX 4 WY Special Function module, as
shown in Figure 2-8. It uses 8 I/O address locations.
4.
2-10
Installing the Module
Assign the starting I/O address and write the completed I/O
configuration to the programmable logic controller memory, using the
Write PLC function.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
NOTE: Because discretes and words do not share the same image register
addresses, the slot 02 entry in Figure 2-8 could be address 0001.
Slot Number:
Install the module into
any slot in the I/O base.
Base Number:
Displays number
of the current base.
I/O MODULE DEFINITION FOR CHANNEL . . . 1
SLOT
I/O
ADDRESS
SF Module:
The FMS CP module
is a Special Function
module.
BASE . . . 00
NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I/O
X
Y
WX
WY
SPECIAL
FUNCTION
01 . . . .
0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . .
00 . . .
00
...
00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No
02 . . . .
0017 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00 . . .
00 . . .
04
...
04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yes
03 . . . .
0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00 . . .
00 . . .
00
...
00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No
04 . . . .
0025 . . . . . . . . . . . . 00 . . .
08 . . .
00
...
00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No
I/O Address:
Assign a starting I/O address
The FMS CP module logs
in as 4 WXs and 4 WYs.
Figure 2-8 Sample I/O Module Definition Chart in TISOFT
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Installing the Module
2-11
2.8
PROFIBUS Network Card and Software Packages
You must install one of the PROFIBUS card/software packages listed in
Table 2-2 on your PC in order to allow it to communicate with the FMS CP
module on a PROFIBUS network. Consult the documentation provided with
each package for information on installing the hardware and software.
Table 2-2 PROFIBUS Network Card/Software Packages
PROFIBUS Card
CP 5412 (A2) 6GK1 541-2BA00
(PC-AT card)
CP 5511 6GK1 551-1AA00
(PCMCIA card)
CP 5611 6GK1 561-1AA00
(PCI card)
Software Package
S7-5412/Windows 95 6GK1 702-5CH00-3AA0
S7-5412/Windows NT 6GK1 702-5CB00-3AA0
SOFTNET S7/Windows 95/NT for PROFIBUS
6GK1 704-5CW00-3AA0
NOTE: When editing the S7 configuration on your PC, specify 01 00 for the
remote TSAP of the CP 5434 FMS module.
2-12
Installing the Module
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Chapter 3
Connecting the Network
3.1
3.2
3.3
Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
PROFIBUS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Bus Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-3
3-4
Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Routing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under-Floor Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Ceiling Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface Duct Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
Installing PROFIBUS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Media Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Line Length Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing PROFIBUS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination and Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Termination Selection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Connector Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a PROFIBUS Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connecting the Network
3-1
3.1
Cables and Connectors
This section describes products available from Siemens that are used to set
up a PROFIBUS-FMS network.
NOTE: Product availability is subject to change. To ensure that the cables,
connectors, and repeaters you choose are physically compatible with the
other components you select, consult the newest edition of Siemens’
SIMATIC NET Industrial Communications Networks, Catalog IK 10.
If you use PROFIBUS LAN products produced by vendors other than
Siemens, be sure to check that all the products you select are compatible.
PROFIBUS Cable
As shown in Figure 3-1, PROFIBUS cable is shielded, twisted-pair with
circular cross-section. Due to double-shielding, PROFIBUS cable is
particularly suited for industrial environments. Grounding continuity is
implemented through the outer shield of the cable. A standard cable that
conforms to the PROFIBUS cable requirements is available through
Siemens; specify 6XV1 830-0AH10.
Figure 3-1 PROFIBUS Twisted-Pair Cable
3-2
Connecting the Network
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
PROFIBUS Bus
Connectors
Standard cable connectors that conform to the PROFIBUS requirements are
shown in Figure 3-2. The following standard cable connectors are available
from Siemens:
•
6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 (for vertical connector without PG connector,
9.6 Kbits to 12 Mbits)
•
6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0 (for vertical connector with PG connector,
9.6 Kbits to 12 Mbits)
Figure 3-2 PROFIBUS Bus Connectors
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connecting the Network
3-3
Cables and Connectors (continued)
PROFIBUS Repeater
A PROFIBUS repeater available from Siemens is shown in Figure 3-3. The
repeater connects two RS-485 segments, enabling expanded physical
networking. Nine repeaters may be used in a series. A standard PROFIBUS
repeater is available from Siemens; specify 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0
(9.6 Kbits to 12 Mbits).
L1 M PE M5
DC
24V
A1 B1 A1 B1
RS 485–REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2
Figure 3-3 PROFIBUS Repeater
3-4
Connecting the Network
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
3.2
Cable Routing
Guidelines
Cable Routing
Methods
Follow these suggestions when planning your cable routing.
•
Allow for system growth. Provide for attachment of future bases by
routing cable through all possible areas of plant expansion.
•
Take steps to bypass or eliminate noise sources in order to reduce
system data error rates. The following are common sources of electrical
noise:
Power distribution mains
Arcing motors and motor starters
Fluorescent lighting
Undesired signal transfer between adjacent circuits
Poor terminations of cable connector
•
Do not allow cable to come into contact with any other electrical
conductor.
•
If cabling is installed inside a conduit, the conduit should be grounded
according to applicable electrical codes.
The type of routing is usually determined by the type of building in which
the cables are being installed. Any combination of the following may be used
to route the cables: under-floor, in-ceiling, or surface duct.
!
WARNING
Electrical and fire safety must be considered in planning the installation.
Safety codes exist to limit the danger of fire and smoke hazards caused by
cable installations.
To ensure safety compliance, observe local installation code guidelines.
Under-Floor
Routing
In under-floor routing, the cable can be enclosed in ducts or, with raised
flooring, in the open air.
•
Duct systems are better protected against unauthorized taps or
terminal blocks, but expansion is more difficult and expensive than
with open air systems.
•
Open air systems provide more freedom of access, and allow maximum
system expansion flexibility.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connecting the Network
3-5
Cable Routing (continued)
In-Ceiling Routing
For in-ceiling routing, cables are usually supported in troughs or with hooks
and clamps every 10 to 15 feet (3 to 4.5 m).
Some advantages of in-ceiling routing are listed below.
•
Flexibility
•
Low-cost installation
•
Accessibility of cabling
Some disadvantages of in-ceiling routing are listed below.
Surface Duct
Routing
•
Collection of dust and other debris in ceilings
•
Hazardous working conditions in ceilings
•
Impracticality for buildings without drop ceilings
Surface duct routing is usually installed along baseboards or attached to
walls at desktop height. While surface duct routing protects cables from
both physical and electro-magnetic effects, it usually requires I/O bases to
be positioned near a wall.
NOTE: Consult your cable vendor for proper cable-pulling techniques so that
no kinks occur in the cable during installation.
3-6
Connecting the Network
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
3.3
Installing PROFIBUS Cables
Media Options
The PROFIBUS-FMS port provides communication over shielded twisted
pair (RS-485) cable media.
System Layout
Figure 3-4 shows a sample system layout for the PROFIBUS network.
Personal computer with
COM5434 Configurator
software and CP 5412,
CP 5511, or CP 5611 card.
SIMATIC 545
SIMATIC 555
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC 560/565
SIMATIC S7-300
R
B
C
SIMATIC 575
Repeater
Figure 3-4 Sample System Layout for PROFIBUS-FMS
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connecting the Network
3-7
Installing PROFIBUS Cables (continued)
PROFIBUS Cable
Specifications
Table 3-1 lists the PROFIBUS EN 50 170 cable line specifications.
Table 3-1 PROFIBUS Cable Specifications
Feature
PROFIBUS Line
Length Limits
Specification
Impedance
135 Ohm to 165 Ohm (3 MHz to 20 MHz)
Capacitance
9.1 pF/ft.
Resistance
33.5 /1000 ft.
Attenuation
0.27 dB/100 ft.
(0.9 dB/100 m (f=200kHz))
Conductor Area
20 AWG to 22 AWG
(0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2)
Cable Diameter
0.315 in. 0.02 in.
(8 mm 0.5 mm)
(<30 nF/km)
(<110 Ohm/km)
Up to 10 bus segments can be connected in series. Line length limits are
determined by baud rate. The distance between the two most widely
separated stations must not exceed the values shown in Table 3-2. Use
repeaters between each cable segment. (For fiber-optic cable line length
limits, consult the newest edition of Siemens’ SIMATIC NET Industrial
Communications Networks, Catalog IK 10.)
Table 3-2 PROFIBUS Line Length Limits
Baud Rate
3-8
Maximum Segment
Length
Maximum Installation
Length
9.6 to 93.75 KBaud
3,930 ft. (1,200 m)
39,300 ft. (12,000 m)
187.5 KBaud
3,280 ft. (1,000 m)
32,800 ft. (10,000 m)
500 KBaud
1,310 ft. (400 m)
13,100 ft. (4,000 m)
1.5 MBaud
660 ft. (200 m)
6,600 ft. (2,000 m)
3 Mbaud to 12 MBaud
330 ft. (100 m)
3,300 ft. (1,000 m)
Connecting the Network
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Installing
PROFIBUS Cable
The rules for proper PROFIBUS installation follow:
•
Create a daisy-chain arrangement, not a star arrangement.
•
You can connect up to 32 devices on one cable segment. Each repeater
counts as a device.
•
Do not run the cables near power wires.
•
The communication cable consists of two color-coded insulated wires
that are twisted together and surrounded by a shield. The cable is
encased in an insulating jacket. When wiring the system, the same
color of wire must be connected to the TX/RX+ pin throughout the
system.
•
Do not cross the TX/RX+ signals and the TX/RX– signals. Wire all of
the TX/RX+ pins (terminal B on the Siemens connectors) together. Wire
all of the TX/RX– pins (terminal A on the Siemens connectors) together.
Crossing the wires at any point in the system causes communication
problems.
•
Proper termination and bias of PROFIBUS cable is important for
reliable communication. The device at each end of a PROFIBUS cable
segment must be terminated and biased; any devices connected
between the end nodes of a segment must not be terminated or biased.
See the following pages for more information about termination and
bias.
•
All PROFIBUS cable connectors must be properly grounded. With a
Siemens PROFIBUS connector, proper grounding is accomplished when
the bare cable shield contacts the metal connector ground.
•
Tighten screws on all PROFIBUS connectors throughout your system
to a maximum torque of 8 in-lb (0.9 N-m) in order to ensure a good
ground connection.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connecting the Network
3-9
Installing PROFIBUS Cables (continued)
Termination and
Bias
The device at each extreme end of a PROFIBUS cable must be terminated
and biased; any connections made between segment ends must not be
terminated or biased. See Figure 3-5.
Controller with
PROFIBUS-FMS
CP module
N = PROFIBUS-FMS station
Segment end must be
terminated and biased.
Termination and bias required.
N
N
N
N
Figure 3-5 Terminate the Network at the Endpoints
Using a Termination
Selection Switch
Siemens PROFIBUS connectors have selectable termination and bias built
in. The connectors are designed to handle baud rates from 9600 baud to
12 Mbaud and have an external switch (see Figure 3-6). You set the
selection switch to the On position to enable termination and bias, or Off to
disable termination and bias.
9-pin
D-shell connector
External
termination
switch
ON
OFF
Figure 3-6 Siemens Connector, External Termination Switch
3-10
Connecting the Network
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
PROFIBUS Connector
Schematics
Figure 3-7 shows the schematic for PROFIBUS connectors designed to
handle all baud rates, from 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud.
Pin 6
(BIAS SUPPLY +5V)
Bias Resistor, 390 ohm, 1/8 W, 5%
110 nH
Pin 3
(TX/RX+)
110 nH
Internal Connection B
Internal Connection B
Termination Resistor, 220 ohm, 1/8 W, 5%
110 nH
Pin 8
(TX/RX–)
110 nH
Internal Connection A
Internal Connection A
Bias Resistor, 390 ohm, 1/8 W, 5%
Pin 5
(BIAS SUPPLY GND)
Pins 1, 2, 4, 7, and 9 are not connected.
Figure 3-7 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud Connector Schematic
NOTE: Connector schematics and mechanical features are subject to change
without notice. Check with your local Siemens distributor for the latest
version.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connecting the Network
3-11
Installing PROFIBUS Cables (continued)
Installing a
PROFIBUS
Connector
The following procedure describes how to attach a Siemens PROFIBUS
connector to your cable. Also consult the instructions that come with your
specific Siemens connector.
1.
Open the connector housing by loosening both housing screws
(see Figure 3-8).
9-pin
D-shell connector
External
termination
switch
Cable guide
Housing screws
Figure 3-8 Typical PROFIBUS Connector
2.
Remove the cover of the housing.
3.
Remove 1.25 inches (30 mm) of the cable sheath to expose the shielding
below. See Figure 3-9.
Approx. 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Approx. 1/2 in. (12 mm)
Approx. 3/4 in. (19 mm)
Approx. 1/2 in. (12 mm)
Cable shielding
Cable sheath
Figure 3-9 Stripping the Wires
4.
Remove a 0.75-inch (19 mm) portion of the cable shielding to expose the
two signal wires.
To ensure that the connection is properly grounded, you must leave
enough exposed cable shielding (0.5 inches, 12 mm) to make a proper
contact with the metal cable guide on the connector. See Figure 3-9.
3-12
Connecting the Network
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
5.
Remove 0.25 inches (6 mm) of insulation at the wire ends.
6.
Insert the signal wires into the cable terminals.
Be sure to connect the same wire color to the TX/RX+ pin for every
device throughout your system. Crossing the wires at any point creates
communications problems.
7.
Set the termination switch to the correct position. See Figure 3-10.
A. Attaching connector at segment end
ON
OFF
É
É
A B A B
Switch position ON
(termination and
bias enabled).
B. Attaching connector to midpoint of segment
ON
OFF
É
É
A B A B
Switch position OFF
(termination and
bias disabled).
Figure 3-10 Attaching Connector and Selecting Termination
8.
Put the cover back on the connector housing.
Be sure that the bare cable shielding makes contact with the metal
cable guide on the connector, to ensure proper grounding for the
connection.
9.
Tighten the connector housing screws to a maximum torque of 8 in-lb
(0.9 N-m) in order to ensure a good connection.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connecting the Network
3-13
Chapter 4
Communication Services
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Communication Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Modes of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peerlink II Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication between the PLC and the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
Addressing on Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Multiplexed Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-7
4-7
FMS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Communication Job Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Access Rights to Variables in FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-10
Send-Receive Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-11
Peerlink II Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Transmitting and Receiving Peer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-12
S7 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
S7 Services Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Communication Services
4-1
4.1
Overview
Communication
Services
The FMS CP module supports the following types of communication
services:
•
Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS) services are based on layer 7, the
application layer of the OSI 7 Layer model. FMS services use an
industry-standard, open protocol, which allows for communication
between SIMATIC and third-party FMS devices.
•
Send-Receive services are based on layer 2, the data link layer of the
OSI 7 Layer model, a flexible, lower-level protocol (using bytes as
opposed to named variables). Because Send-Receive services use layer
2, transmission is limited to a single network segment. Send-Receive
services are supported by the module to allow for communication
between the FMS CP module and Send-Receive devices, such as S5.
•
S7 services are based on layer 7, the application layer of the
OSI 7 Layer model. S7 services use a proprietary protocol for
communication between SIMATIC S7 devices.
•
Peerlink II services are based on layer 2, the data link layer of the
OSI 7 Layer model. Because Peerlink II services use layer 2,
transmission is limited to a single network segment. Peerlink II
services are supported by SIMATIC 505 only. Peerlink II offers more
flexibility with greater data handling ability than Peerlink.
These services can all be used concurrently up to the network capacity.
Functional Modes
of Communication
The FMS CP module can act as a client or as a server when you configure
FMS and Send-Receive services; it can initiate, or respond to, requests for
data. The FMS CP module acts only as a server for S7 services, responding
to remote requests from S7 devices on the network (see Table 4-1).
Table 4-1 Service Modes of the FMS CP Module
4-2
Service
Client
Server
FMS Services
YES
YES
Send-Receive Services
YES
YES
S7 Services
NO
YES
Communication Services
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Connections
Connections are the logical links between stations on the network. You
define connections for the FMS CP module using the COM5434
Configurator. The FMS CP module supports the following connection types:
•
FMS connections
•
FDL connections
•
S7 connections (as server only; connections are not configured in the
FMS CP module, and have no associated jobs)
You must define connections before you can define communication jobs.
Communication
Jobs
Peerlink II Services
Server Functions
A communication job is a pre-defined collection of variables that can be
triggered within the user program to read from or write to another network
station. Communication jobs allow you to use the FMS CP module as a
client to transfer complex data over logical links on the network. You
configure communication jobs using the COM5434 Configurator. The
FMS CP module supports the following job types:
•
FMS jobs
•
Send-Receive jobs
Peerlink II services allow the global broadcast of data (up to 234 bytes) on
your network to other SIMATIC 505 FMS CP modules. You configure
Peerlink II services using the COM5434 Configurator. The FMS CP
supports the following Peerlink II services:
•
Transmission of 1 peer block
•
Reception of up to 31 peer blocks
Server functions allow the FMS CP module to respond to requests received
from clients on the network. The FMS CP module supports the following
functions:
•
FMS server functions — require you to configure FMS variables using
the COM5434 Configurator.
•
S7 server functions — require no job or variable configurations.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Communication Services
4-3
Overview (continued)
Communication
between the PLC
and the FMS CP
Module
The FMS CP module is registered in the I/O memory map of its controller as
a 4 word input (WX) and 4 word output (WY) Special Function (SF) module.
You must assign the starting I/O address, as described in Section 2.7, in
order for the programmable logic controller to be able to communicate with
the FMS CP module.
NOTE: The designations WX1, 2, 3, 4 and WY5, 6, 7, 8, shown in the
COM5434 Configurator, are relative to the actual starting address that you
assign in TISOFT or SoftShop for the slot where the FMS CP module is
installed. (See Section 2.7.) For example, if you assign 9 as the starting
address, then the programmable logic controller reads WX1, 2, 3, 4, and
WY5, 6, 7, 8 as WX9, 10, 11, 12 and WY13, 14, 15, 16. Of course, if you
configure the starting address as 1, the actual addresses match the relative
addresses shown in the COM5434 Configurator.
Each bit in the first three words corresponds to a job. For example, if WX1 is
configured as the first word input and WY5 is configured as the first word
output for the module, then bit 1 in WY5 is the Job Start Bit for Job1, while
bit 1 in WX1 is the Job Active Bit for that same Job1 (see Figure 4-1).
Each bit in word inputs 1 to 3 and word outputs 5 to 7 is associated with a job.
1
16-bit words
16
WY5
WY6
WY7
WY8
Start
PLC → CP
Job Start
(WY5, bit 1)
1
0
Acknowledge
WX1
WX2
WX3
WX4
CP → PLC
12345...
MSB
Job Active
(WX1, bit 1)
Reset
Job complete
1
0
16
LSB
Figure 4-1 Communication between the PLC and the FMS CP Module
4-4
Communication Services
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
These bits are used to synchronize (handshake) communication between the
user program and the FMS CP module during communication jobs.
•
The Job Start Bit is a user-selected bit in one of the available output
words (WY) assigned to the FMS CP module. The Job Start bit is used
in the user program to trigger a data transfer job. The FMS CP module
must see a 0 to 1 transition on the Job Start Bit to begin a data
transfer job.
•
The Job Active Bit is a corresponding bit in the input word (WX) set by
the FMS CP module. The Job Active bit signals that a requested data
transfer job is in progress. When this bit goes back to 0, the controller
knows that the job has been completed and can then initiate another
job by setting the corresponding WY bit to 1.
•
The bits in the first three output words assigned to the FMS CP module
are available as the Job Start Bits. In this example, any of the 48 bits
in WY5, WY6, and WY7 can be used as the Job Start Bit for a job as
needed. The corresponding bit in WX1, WX2, or WX3 (the Job Active
Bit) signals a job in progress.
The handshaking, or synchronizing, of a job such as the one shown in
Figure 4-1 can be summarized as follows:
1.
With the WY bit set to 0, the programmable logic controller must wait
for the corresponding WX bit to become 0 before a job can be initiated.
2.
The controller sets the WY bit from 0 to 1 to trigger the job.
3.
The FMS CP module registers the rising edge on the WY bit, sets the
corresponding WX bit to 1, and starts the job.
NOTE: For a job to execute, the FMS CP module must see the transition of
the WY job start bit. Either a reset of the FMS CP module, or a power cycle
of the entire programmable logic controller base, may result in the ladder
logic program setting a WY job start bit prior to the FMS CP module
recovery. When this condition occurs, the FMS CP module does not execute
the job.
A timer instruction (TMR or TMRF) may be implemented in the controller.
The timer is enabled when the WY job start bit is set. The timer is reset in
response to the WX job active bit. If the WX job active bit never responds to
a WY job start bit, the timer is allowed to time out and clears the current
WY job active bit. The next execution of the ladder logic starts the WY job
start bit under normal operating conditions. To allow ample FMS CP
module startup time, set the timer preset value to 30 seconds.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Communication Services
4-5
Overview (continued)
4-6
4.
The programmable logic controller recognizes the WX bit transition to
1, and then resets the WY bit to 0.
5.
The FMS CP module completes the job, stores the job status in
programmable logic controller V-memory, and, when it sees WY bit
reset to 0, resets the WX bit to 0.
6.
The programmable logic controller sees WX return to 0, indicating that
the job is complete. It can check the status word for errors: if none, the
programmable logic controller knows that the data was sent/received
successfully.
7.
The programmable logic controller can start the job again, whenever it
is ready, by repeating the sequence from Step 2.
Communication Services
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
4.2
Addressing on Your Network
Multiplexed
Addressing
PROFIBUS networks use a system of multiplexed addressing (multi-tiered)
for connections, as shown in Figure 4-2. The most basic address of a device
is the PROFIBUS network station address. The next level of addressing is a
Link Service Access Point (LSAP). Each station address is associated with
multiple LSAPs.
Network
Station
Address
Station
Address
2
3
2 3 4 5
x x 61 62
Station
Address
10
2 3 4 5
x x 61 62
2 3 4 5
x x 61 62
LSAPs
Figure 4-2 Multiplexed Addressing
Station Address
When you set up your network, you assign each device a station address,
and then use this address when you configure the FMS CP module.
LSAPs
As shown in Figure 4-2, each device has a number of LSAPs that you use for
addressing FMS and FDL connections. Each LSAP can be used for one
connection only (except for FMS slaves). Some LSAPs are unavailable
because they are dedicated to other functions. If you select an LSAP that
has been previously dedicated, you receive a message to select a different
LSAP for your connection. Refer to Table A-10 for LSAP assignment
restrictions.
For example, an FMS connection could be set up between LSAP 3 on Station
Address 2, and LSAP 5 on Station Address 10 (as shown on the example
network in Figure 4-3). However, LSAP 3 on Station Address 2 and LSAP 5
on Station Address 10 are then occupied and may not be reused.
Network
Station
Address
Station
Address
2
3
2 3 4 5
x x 61 62
2 3 4 5
x x 61 62
Station
Address
10
2 3 4 5
x x 61 62
LSAPs
Figure 4-3 Network Addressing Example
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Communication Services
4-7
4.3
FMS Services
FMS Connections
Before you configure an FMS communication job, you must first define an
FMS connection using the COM5434 Configurator. To establish a successful
connection, the services of the communication partners must be matched. As
requester, you specify the services that you expect from the partner device.
As responder, you specify the services you provide for the partner device.
NOTE: The software generates an “Object Dictionary” that contains the
names and index numbers of the FMS variables you configure. To enable
partners to access variables by name, enable the Get Object Dictionary
service when configuring an FMS connection. (Refer to Figure 5-15.)
To define an FMS connection using the COM5434 Configurator, follow the
steps described in Section 5.6.
FMS
Communication
Job Types
The FMS CP module acts as a client (initiator) for the following FMS jobs:
•
Read – reads data from a data area of the communication partner
specified by a name or index.
•
Write – transfers data from a specified local data area to a data area of
the communication partner.
•
Information Report – allows unconfirmed transmission of variables by
an FMS server.
•
Status – the partner device sends logical and physical status
information that may include the following items: whether
communication is possible, for example, CPU is in RUN; physical
status of CPU, for example, maintenance is required. (Refer to
Section A.3 for more information about Status request responses.)
•
Identify – the partner device sends three ASCII strings that provide
the following information: name of the device vendor, name of the
device model, and revision or version of the device. (Refer to Section A.3
for more information about Identify request responses.)
The FMS job types are described and illustrated in Figure 4-4.
These coordinated client jobs must be configured in the client module. To
configure an FMS job, follow the steps described in Section 5.9.
FMS Server
Functions
4-8
The server station must also be configured to coordinate with the client
station. You must configure coordinating FMS connections for all FMS job
types, and FMS variables for Read and Write jobs in the server station.
Communication Services
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
FMS Jobs
Figure 4-4 shows the data flow of each FMS communication job. Each FMS
communication job is configured in the shaded module.
READ
Read Job
Job
Data Flow
Local Station X
Client
Remote Station Y
Server
CPU
FMS CP
CPU
FMS CP
Read (name or index)
Read response (data)
Data to memory
Data from memory
WRITE
Write Job
Job
Data Flow
Local Station X
Client
Remote Station Y
Server
CPU
FMS CP
CPU
FMS CP
Write (data)
Acknowledge
Data from memory
Data to memory
INFORMATION REPORT
Remote Station Y
Server
Information Report (data)
Data to memory
CPU
FMS CP
CPU
FMS CP
Data Flow
STATUS
Status Job
Status Request
Status Information
Remote Station Y
Server
CPU
FMS CP
CPU
FMS CP
Data Flow
Data to memory
IDENTIFY
Identify Job
Data Flow
Identity Request
Identity Information
Remote Station Y
Server
CPU
FMS CP
CPU
FMS CP
Data to memory
Status information is
transferred from a remote
network station and stored
in a specified local memory
address by the client
FMS CP module.
Status Data
Job
Local Station X
Client
Data is transferred from a
variable name or index in
the server station to a
variable of the same name
or index in the client. (This is
an unacknowledged job.)
Data from memory
Job
Local Station X
Client
Data stored in the local
station is written to a
specified variable name or
index in a remote station by
the client FMS CP module.
The local address source of
the data must be specified.
Information Report Job
Job
Local Station X
Client
Data stored in a remote
source is read by the client
FMS CP module, and stored
in a specified local memory
address. The remote source
must be specified by a
variable name or an index.
Identity information is
transferred from a remote
network station and stored
in a specified local memory
address by the client
FMS CP module.
Identity Data
Figure 4-4 FMS Communication Jobs
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Communication Services
4-9
FMS Services (continued)
Specifying Access
Rights to Variables
in FMS Connections
When you define an FMS connection, you must specify access rights to the
variables you have configured (which are listed in the Object Dictionary).
Access rights are determined in two ways: passwords and group numbers.
(Refer to Figure 4-5.)
Password Access to a variable is only possible with the identical password
setting on the partner.
•
0: The FMS client must specify the password “0” for authorization
when the connection is established. Access is possible for all FMS
clients that specify the password.
•
>0: The FMS client must specify this password for authorization
during connection establishment.
Group Numbers Access to a variable is only possible when at least one
group number is selected to match the setting on the partner. Selecting
group numbers is a further method for selectively restricting access rights.
You assign Groups 0 to 7 for each connection and for each variable.
Station 1
Password = 2
Password Access
Job on Station 1 can access
Station 2
variable on Station 2.
Password = 1
(password match)
Variable PW = 1
Variable PW = 2
Station 1
Station 2
Password = 1
Password = 1
Variable PW = 1
Variable PW = 2
Station 1
Groups 1, 2
Job on Station 2 can access
variable on Station 1.
(password match)
Job on Station 1 cannot access
variable on Station 2.
(password mismatch)
Job on Station 2 can access
variable on Station 1.
(password match)
Group Number Access
Job on Station 1 can access
Station 2
variable on Station 2.
Groups 3, 4
(group number match)
Variable Group 3
Var. Groups 1, 5
Station 1
Station 2
Groups 2, 3
Groups 3, 4
Variable Group 3
Var. Groups 1, 5
Job on Station 2 can access
variable on Station 1.
(group number match)
Job on Station 1 cannot access
variable on Station 2.
(group number mismatch)
Job on Station 2 can access
variable on Station 1.
(group number match)
Figure 4-5 Access to Variables via Passwords and Group Numbers
4-10
Communication Services
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
4.4
Send-Receive Services
FDL Connections
Before you configure a Send-Receive job, you must first define an FDL
connection using the COM5434 Configurator. To define an FDL connection,
follow the steps described in Section 5.7.
Send-Receive Jobs
The FMS CP module supports Send and Receive job types with FDL
connections. To configure a Send or Receive job, follow the steps described in
Section 5.10.
Figure 4-6 shows the data flow of each Send-Receive communication job.
Each job must be configured in both the module executing the Send job and
the module executing the Receive job.
SEND
Send Job
Data Flow
Remote Station Y
Send
Receive
Data from memory
CPU
FMS CP
CPU
FMS CP
Local Station X
Data to memory
RECEIVE
Receive Job
Data Flow
Remote Station Y
Receive
Send
CPU
FMS CP
CPU
FMS CP
Local Station X
Data to memory
Data stored in a specified
memory address in the
local station is sent to a
remote network partner.
The destination address of
the data in the remote
station is not specified.
Data from memory
Data is received from a
remote network partner
and is stored in a specified
local memory address. The
source address of the data
in the remote station is not
specified.
Figure 4-6 Send-Receive Communication Jobs
NOTE: In general, it is best not to configure more than one Send or Receive
job for each FDL connection.
!
CAUTION
The FMS CP module fails if you try to execute two Receive jobs at the same
time on a single FDL connection. Module failure could cause unexpected
results in your control application, which could result in personal injury, and/or
damage to property.
To avoid this problem, do not program more than one Send or Receive job to
execute simultaneously on a single connection.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Communication Services
4-11
4.5
Peerlink II Services
Transmitting and
Receiving
Peer Blocks
Peerlink II is an unacknowledged broadcast service that allows the FMS CP
module to transmit one peer block to other stations and receive up to 31
peer blocks from other FMS CP modules on a scan-by-scan (cyclic) basis, as
shown in Figure 4-7.
TRANSMIT
Transmit
Data Flow
505 Network
CPU
FMS CP
SIMATIC 505
Transmit
Data from memory
One block of data stored in
a specified memory address
in the local station is
transmitted to the network.
The block is configured by a
name, a descriptor ID, and
an address.
Note: Transmit is an unacknowledged broadcast.
RECEIVE
Receive
Data Flow
505 Network
CPU
FMS CP
SIMATIC 505
Receive
Up to 31 blocks of data can
be received from the network
by the local station and are
stored in a specified memory
address. The local station
picks these blocks from the
network based on their
descriptor ID.
Note: Data is received when it becomes available on the network.
Figure 4-7 Peerlink II Services Data Flow
Transmission
Intervals
You configure the interval between transmissions of the data as a number of
programmable logic controller scans (see Section 5.5). If the FMS CP module
is unable to transmit at the rate selected, it transmits as often as possible.
Received data is stored by the FMS CP module. If the FMS CP module is
unable to process received data at the rate at which it is received, it stores
the most recently processed data.
NOTE: No status information is stored by Peerlink II services. If the
FMS CP module is unable to process data at the requested transmission
interval rate, the FMS CP module does not generate an error message in
the status report. (Refer to Chapter 7 for information on viewing actual peer
transmit intervals in the Peer Block Status diagnostics dialog.)
4-12
Communication Services
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
4.6
S7 Services
S7 Services
Supported
S7 services allow S7 devices to read and write data in the 505 CPU memory.
The FMS CP module also responds to Status requests from an S7 station.
S7 services supported by the FMS CP module are shown in Figure 4-8.
Refer to Section A.2 for details of S7-to-505 memory addressing.
READ/STATUS
Read or Status Request
Job
Data Flow
Server
505 FMS CP
Client
S7 Station
CPU
FMS CP
Read or Status request
Read/Status response
Data from memory
Data to memory
WRITE
Write Request
Job
Data Flow
Server
505 FMS CP
Client
S7 Station
CPU
FMS CP
Write (data)
Acknowledge
Data to memory
The client S7 station issues
a Read or Status request for
data stored at a specified
address in the server 505
FMS CP. The server sends
the requested data.
Data from memory
Data stored in the client
S7 station is written to a
specified address in the
server FMS CP station.
The server returns an
acknowledgement.
Figure 4-8 S7 Services Supported as a Server
NOTE: The 505 FMS CP module requires no configuration of connections or
variables to support S7 read, write, or status request services.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Communication Services
4-13
Chapter 5
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5.1
Installing the Software for the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Software Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring PC-to-FMS CP Module Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring PROFIBUS Card Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
Features and Functions of the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Screen Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Commands of the COM5434 Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drag-and-Drop Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Mouse Button Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
Describing the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Entering a Title for Your Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Defining the Module Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
What Is the Module Local Configuration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Module Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
5-13
5.5
Defining Peerlink II Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16
5.6
Defining FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19
5.7
Defining FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
5.8
Overview of Communication Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
5.9
Configuring FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27
5.10
Configuring Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30
5.11
Creating FMS Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33
5.12
Creating FMS Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36
5.13
Saving and Downloading the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-41
Validating and Saving the Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading the Configuration to the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-41
5-42
5-42
5.2
5.3
5.4
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-1
5.1
Installing the Software for the FMS CP Module
Software Package
The COM5434 Configurator software package for the FMS CP module is
contained on two 3.5-inch disks.
Operating System
Requirements
To run the COM5434 Configurator software, the operating system and
hardware of your PC must meet the following requirements:
Installing the
COM5434
Configurator
Software
•
Windows 95 or Windows NT
•
486 or greater, with at least 8 Mb of RAM
For Windows 95, you can use the procedure shown in Figure 5-1 to install
the COM5434 Configurator software.
Installing COM5434 Configurator Software for
Windows 95 in your Personal Computer
For Windows 95, follow these steps:
Disk 1
1. Insert Disk 1 in your computer.
2. Click the Start button to open the
Windows 95 menu.
3. Click on the Run... menu item.
4. In the Run dialog, type: A:\SETUP
5. Click on “OK” or press ENTER to start the
setup procedure.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete
the installation.
7. Double click on Configurator icon to start.
Figure 5-1 Installing the COM5434 Configurator Software
For Windows NT or Windows 95, you can use the following procedure to
install the COM5434 Configurator software:
5-2
1.
Insert Disk 1 in your computer’s disk drive.
2.
Use the Windows Explorer to access your disk drive and display the
contents of Disk 1.
3.
Select the file named SETUP. EXE.
4.
Double click on SETUP. EXE or press ENTER to start the setup
procedure.
5.
Follow the on-screen setup prompts to complete the installation.
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Starting the
COM5434
Configurator
Software
If you have successfully installed the COM5434 Configurator software, you
can start it in one of the following ways:
Configuring
PC-to-FMS CP
Module
Communications
•
Double-click on the icon that appears on your Windows desktop.
•
Click the Start button to open the Windows 95 menu, select Programs,
then locate and click on the COM5434 program in the sub-menu.
Refer to Section 2.4 for information on connecting the programming cable
from your PC to the FMS CP module. Once the programming cable is
installed properly, you need to configure the communication setup.
1.
Select the menu command Transfer → Communications Setup... as
shown in Figure 5-2. The first dialog allows you to select which port
you want to configure. Select the PC Serial Port.
2.
Click on the “Configure Port” button to access the PC-to-Module Serial
Port Dialog.
Untitled – COM5434
File Edit Transfer
Transfer
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
Communications Setup...
Select this menu
command.
Download to the CP5434
<no description>
Ctrl+D
Upload
the CP5434
Module
Localfrom
Configuration
Ctrl+U
P–P
FMS
FDL
Peerlink
II Services
Validate
Configuration
NowPortCtrl+B
PC
Communication
Setup
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Select PC Port Media:
Communication Jobs
Description:
File Name: UNTITLED
Directory:
Modified?: NO
FMS Jobs
PC Serial Port (RS232)
Send-Receive Jobs
PROFIBUS Card
FMS Data Types
FMS
S–R
DTs
FMS Variables
Click here to select
port number and
baud rate.
Exit
Configure Port
Allows the selection and configuration of PC to CP5434-FMS communications
Figure 5-2 Configuring the Communications Setup
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-3
Installing the Software for the FMS CP Module (continued)
3.
Select the port number that corresponds to the port on your PC, and
select the communications baud rate that matches the jumper setting
on the module (see Section 2.2), as shown in Figure 5-3.
4.
Click on the “Test” button to verify the communication setup.
5.
Click on OK when the “Communication Successful” message appears.
(If a “Comm Failed” message appears, check your port number or baud
rate, make adjustments as needed, and try again.)
6.
Click on “Exit” to exit each of the communication setup dialogs.
PC-to-Module Serial Port (RS232)
Port Number:
COM1:
COM2:
COM2:
Baud Rate:
38.4k
19.2k
9.6k
COM2:
Exit
Click here to test port
communications.
Test
Figure 5-3 PC-to-Module Serial Port Setup Dialog
Configuring
PROFIBUS Card
Communications
To allow your PC to communicate with the FMS CP module on a PROFIBUS
network, you must install one of the PROFIBUS card/software packages
listed in Table 2-2 on your PC.
NOTE: You must configure the local module parameters using the RS-232
port before you can use a PROFIBUS card. The Local Module Configuration
parameters are not downloaded when using a PROFIBUS card because this
would change the PROFIBUS communications and possibly cause an
interruption during download. To change these parameters, reconnect the
RS-232 cable.
5-4
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Use the following procedure to configure your PC to communicate on a
PROFIBUS network:
1.
Select the menu command Transfer → Communications Setup... as
shown in Figure 5-2. The first dialog allows you to select which port
you want to configure. Select the PROFIBUS Card option button.
2.
Click on the “Configure Port” button to access the Select PROFIBUS
Connection Dialog, shown in Figure 5-4.
3.
Select Device. The device represents a PROFIBUS card and driver.
4.
Select VFD. The Virtual Field Device is a group of connections
configured for a given device.
5.
Select Connection. The connections represent actual connections on the
PROFIBUS network.
6.
Click on the “Test” button to verify the communication setup.
Select Profibus Connection
1) Select Device:
CP_L2_1
DPONLINE
S7ONLINE
2) Select VFD:
VFD1
3) Select Connection:
505 CP5434FMS Addr 4
505 CP5434FMS Addr 5
Exit
Test
Figure 5-4 PROFIBUS Connection Dialog
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-5
5.2
Features and Functions of the COM5434 Configurator Software
Getting Started
To use all of the commands and features described in this chapter, you must
have installed the COM5434 Configurator software and connected your PC
to the FMS CP module. From your Windows screen, double-click on the
configurator icon to start the COM5434 Configurator.
To access commands in the COM5434 Configurator, point to an item in the
menu bar with the mouse and click to open the drop-down menu.
•
Windows menu items may also be selected by pressing the Alt key
and the underlined letter of the menu item. For example, to select File,
F
either click on the word File, or press Alt
. This opens the
drop-down menu.
•
Pressing the Esc key (escape) is the same as selecting the Cancel
button in a window.
Figure 5-5 shows the main screen of the COM5434 Configurator.
Minimize
Title Bar
Untitled – COM5434
File Edit Transfer
Options Diagnostics
Help
Maximize/Restore
Close
✂
Menu Bar
Toolbar
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
Configuration
Tree
Description:
File Name: UNTITLED
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Directory:
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Modified?: NO
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
Last Saved File:
Last Saved Directory:
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
Input Pane
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Resizable
splitter bar
Edit page indicator
Status Bar
Current configuration file specification
Figure 5-5 COM5434 Configurator Screen
5-6
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Main Screen
Features
The main features of the COM5434 Configurator screen (shown in
Figure 5-5) are described below.
The title bar contains the title of the current configuration file and
Windows-based buttons that allow you to change the size of the configurator
screen: a minimize button, a maximize/restore button, and a close button.
Title Bar
The menu bar contains drop-down menu commands. The menu
commands allow you to perform the functions of the configurator software.
The menu commands are described in the following pages.
Menu Bar
The toolbar contains buttons which you can use as shortcuts to
perform frequently used menu commands. The toolbar buttons are
described in the following pages.
Toolbar
The configuration tree displays the structure of the
current configuration. Branches of the tree can be expanded and collapsed.
For example, if you have configured five FMS connections, and you do not
want the connections to display, double-click on the FMS Connections
branch, and the connection names are hidden. Double-click again and the
tree expands, displaying the connection names.
Configuration Tree
The status bar contains a description of an item currently in
focus or an item that corresponds to the current location of the cursor.
Status Bar
The input pane is the right pane of the configurator screen
where you enter configuration parameters into named fields.
Input Pane
The splitter bar allows you to resize the width of the input pane
if needed to prevent the field descriptions from wrapping.
Splitter Bar
Indicates that you are in edit mode in the current
configuration input pane.
Edit Page Indicator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-7
Features and Functions of the COM5434 Configurator Software (continued)
Menu Commands
of the COM5434
Configurator
Software
Table 5-1 describes the functions of each of the menu commands of the
COM5434 Configurator software main screen.
Table 5-1 Menu Commands
Menu Commands
Description
New creates a new configuration.
File
New
Open
Save
Save As...
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+O
Ctrl+S
Print...
Ctrl+P
Open opens an existing configuration file.
Save saves the work in the current file.
Save As saves the current configuration with
a new file name.
Print sends the configuration to a printer.
Print Preview allows you to see what the
output will look like before you print it.
Print Preview
Print Setup...
1_NEWFILE.fms
Print Setup allows you to configure printer
settings.
Recent File opens an existing configuration
file; the menu displays the names of the most
recent saved files (for example, 1_newfile.fms)
Exit
Exit exits from the COM5434 Configurator.
Undo Page reverses all changes made to the
current input pane of the configuration.
Edit
Undo Page
Ctrl+Z
New Item
INS
Cut
Copy
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Paste
Ctrl+V
Paste Special
Ctrl+T
New Item creates a new item (connection, job,
etc.) in the configuration.
Cut cuts highlighted text from the
configuration to the clipboard.
Copy copies highlighted text from the
configuration to the clipboard.
Paste pastes copied or cut material from the
clipboard to the cursor location in the
configuration.
Paste Special reverses local and remote
information as it inserts clipboard contents.
Transfer
Communications Setup...
Download to the CP5434
5-8
Communications Setup allows you to select
and configure your communication port.
Download to the CP5434 downloads a
configuration to the FMS CP module.
Upload from the CP5434
Upload from the CP5434 uploads a
configuration from the FMS CP module.
Validate Configuration Now
Validate Configuration Now forces an
immediate validation check of the current
configuration.
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Table 5-1 Menu Commands (continued)
Menu Commands
Options
✔ Automatically Generate Names
✔ Validate Page After Edits
Diagnostics
CP Status
Active Stations
Profibus Statistics
FMS Connection Status
FDL Connection Status
Job Status
Peer Block Status
Description
Automatically Generate Names automatically
generates unique names for each new item
name field.
Validate Page After Edits automatically
checks your work each time that you switch
input panes in the configuration.
CP Status allows you to examine the status of
the FMS CP module on your network.
Active Stations displays a list of all stations
present on the network and the status of each.
Profibus Statistics displays a list of bus
activity statistics and current status.
FMS Connection Status displays a list of all
configured FMS connections and their status.
FDL Connection Status displays a list of all
configured FDL connections and their status.
Job Status displays a list of all FMS and
Send-Receive jobs and their current status.
Peer Block Status displays a list of all
configured Peer Blocks and their status.
Help
Drag-and-Drop
Operations
Contents accesses the contents directory of
the online help system.
Contents
Index
Index accesses the index of the online help
system.
About
About displays version and copyright
information about the COM5434
Configurator.
You can also perform some of the editing functions with “Drag-and-Drop”
mouse actions. For example, if you open another instance of the configurator
and have two windows visible, you can use the drag-and-drop operation to
edit in the following ways:
•
Copy and Paste: Select an item from one configuration tree and hold
the mouse button down while you move (drag) the item to a location in
another configuration and then release the button. This makes an exact
copy of a configured item and pastes it into another configuration.
•
Copy and Paste Special: You can use the drag-and-drop operation as
described above while pressing the Ctrl key on your keyboard. This
makes a copy of a configured item with reversed local/remote settings
and pastes it into another configuration.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-9
Features and Functions of the COM5434 Configurator Software (continued)
Toolbar
Commands
The toolbar, located below the menu bar, consists of buttons which duplicate
frequently used menu commands. A tool tip displays the name of each
button when you place the mouse cursor over it for a few seconds. The
toolbar buttons are described in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Toolbar Buttons
✂
Button
5-10
Menu Equivalent
Description
File → New
Creates a new configuration.
File → Open
Opens an existing configuration file.
File → Save
Saves the work that you have done in the
current file.
Edit → Undo Page
Reverses all changes to the current input pane.
Edit → Cut
Cuts highlighted item from the configuration
and sends it to the clipboard.
Edit → New Item
Creates a new item in the configuration.
Edit → Copy
Copies highlighted item from the configuration
to the clipboard.
Edit → Paste
Pastes copied or cut material from the clipboard
to the cursor location in the configuration.
Edit → Paste
Special
Pastes clipboard contents while automatically
reversing local and remote information.
Transfer → Download to the CP5434
Downloads a configuration to the FMS CP
module.
Transfer → Upload
from the CP5434
Uploads a configuration from the FMS CP
module to the COM5434 Configurator.
Options → Validate
Page After Edits
Validates entries to the current input pane
before you start another configuration page.
Transfer → Validate
Configuration Now
Forces an immediate validation check of the
current configuration.
File → Print
Sends the configuration to a printer.
Help → Contents
Accesses the contents directory of the online
help system.
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Right Mouse Button
Editor
When your mouse cursor is on an item in the configuration tree, you can
click the right mouse button to call up a pop-up menu. This menu duplicates
most of the commands on the Edit menu. With the mouse cursor in a data
entry field, the right mouse button calls up a different pop-up menu that
offers edit commands for selected or nonselected data (see Figure 5-6).
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Peer Block Name: peer_block_1
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Click the right
mouse button.
P–P
FMS
FDL
Descriptor ID: 5
Peer Block Type: Receive Undo
Peerlink II Services
peer_block_1
Local Address:
Cut
FMS Connections New Item
FDL Connections Cut
INS
Copy
Ctrl+X
Paste
Communication Jobs
Copy
Ctrl+C
Delete
FMS Jobs
Paste
Send-Receive Jobs
Ctrl+V
Select All
FMS
S–R
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Paste Special
Pop-up
Edit Menus
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Figure 5-6 Right Mouse Button Editor
Allows you to create a new item (connection, job, etc.) in the
configuration.
New Item
Allows you to cut a highlighted field or item from the configuration.
The cut material is sent to the clipboard.
Cut
Allows you to copy a highlighted field or item from the configuration
to the clipboard.
Copy
Allows you to paste a copied or cut item from the clipboard to the
cursor location in the configuration.
Paste
Allows you to paste a copy of a connection or job to another
configuration and automatically complement the connection settings.
Paste Special
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-11
5.3
Describing the Configuration File
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Click here.
Description:
Module Local Configuration
File Name: UNTITLED
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Directory:
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Modified?: NO
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
Last Saved File:
Last Saved Directory:
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
The “Last Saved...”
fields help identify any
configuration that you
upload from a module.
Current configuration file specification
Figure 5-7 Naming the File
Entering a Title for
Your Configuration
File
The input pane shown in Figure 5-7 allows you to provide a descriptive title
for your configuration file. Click in the Description field in the input pane,
and enter a descriptive title, up to 32 characters, for your configuration.
The remaining fields in this input pane display the following information:
A read-only field that displays the name of the current
configuration file after you have saved and named the file.
File Name
A read-only field that displays the directory location of the
current configuration file after you have saved and named the file.
Directory
A read-only field that indicates whether or not the
configuration file has been modified since the last time it was saved.
Modified?
A read-only field that displays the name of the file that
the configuration was last saved in.
Last Saved File
A read-only field that displays the location of the
directory that the configuration was last saved in.
Last Saved Directory
5-12
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
5.4
Defining the Module Local Configuration
What Is the
Module Local
Configuration?
The module local configuration, shown in Figure 5-8, identifies the local
station address where the FMS CP module resides and defines the
communication parameters used by the FMS network. You cannot configure
connections or communication services for an FMS CP module unless you
define the local configuration for that module.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Click here.
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local Station Address: 4
Highest Station Address: 126
Bus Parameter Profile: Standard
Baud Rate: 1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token): 2
# of Slaves (no token): 0
Slot Time (Tslot): 300
Max. Sta. Delay (Max_Tsdr): 150
Min. Sta. Delay (Min_Tsdr): 11
Setup Time (Tset): 1
Quiet Time (Tqui): 0
Gap Factor: 10
Retry Limit: 1
Token Rotation (Ttr): 9900
This module’s FMS PROFIBUS communication parameters
Figure 5-8 Module Local Configuration
Defining the
Module Local
Configuration
To define the module local configuration, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on Module Local Configuration on the configuration tree.
2.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter the local station address, within a range of
0 to 126, (PROFIBUS network address) where the FMS CP module
resides.
Local Station Address
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-13
Defining the Module Local Configuration (continued)
Use the drop-down list to select the value that
is equal to or greater than the highest PROFIBUS network station
address in use on your network. This number is used by the COM5434
Configurator to calculate the token rotation time for your network. You
may need to adjust this number when you add or subtract stations from
your network. Valid HSA values are 15, 31, 63, and 126.
Highest Station Address
NOTE: If the number configured is higher than the real highest station
address, you may experience a small loss of speed on your network, but the
network will function properly. If the number configured is lower than the
real highest station address on your network, then any stations above the
highest station address will not be added to the token ring. If you try to add
this station to a network ring with a higher station address than the one
you specified as the HSA, an error will occur and your station will not be
allowed to enter the ring.
Bus parameters must match in all the stations on
the network. For most networks, selecting one of the parameter profiles
provided by the COM5434 Configurator will help simplify the process
of configuring the network. The default profile is Standard, but you can
choose Standard-Mixed, FMS-DP Universal, or Custom. Each profile
provides values for the remaining fields on the input pane except for
Baud Rate, # of Masters, and # of Slaves, which you must supply. If you
want to customize values for any of the other fields, select Custom from
the drop-down list. In general, you can use the following profiles:
Bus Parameter Profile
•
Standard for 505-to-505 communications
•
Standard-Mixed for 505-to-S7 communications*
•
FMS-DP Universal for 505-to-S5 communications, and if the
network includes DP devices
Baud Rate Use the drop-down list to select the appropriate baud rate
that the module will use for network communications.
Enter the number of masters on the
network. Masters are the devices on the network that take turns
holding the token.
# of Masters (holds token)
Enter the number of slaves on the network.
Slaves are devices that do not hold the token.
# of Slaves (no token)
*Standard-Mixed matches the current release of STEP 7; earlier releases of STEP 7 may have
different bus parameters, requiring you to select Custom to match parameters.
5-14
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
NOTE: If you customize the Bus Parameter Profile by selecting Custom in
the Bus Parameter Profile field and changing values in any of the fields
below, every device on your network must have the same or a compatible
profile. Otherwise, your system cannot function properly.
If you selected Custom in the Bus Parameter Profile field, you can change
the following parameters for your module local configuration:
Enter the maximum time, in bit times, that a master
station on your network waits for a response after sending a message.
Slot Time (Tslot)
Enter the maximum time, in bit times, that
a responder delays before beginning a response.
Max. Sta. Delay (Max_Tsdr)
Enter the minimum time, in bit times, that a
responder delays before beginning a response.
Min. Sta. Delay (Min_Tsdr)
Enter the time, in bit times, between events and the
necessary reaction.
Setup Time (Tset)
Enter the minimum time, in bit times, that a
transmitting station must wait between sending a message and
enabling its receiver.
Quiet Time (Tqui)
Enter a number that indicates when the master must
perform a gap update. For example, if you choose a gap factor of 10, the
master can hold the token for 9 turns without performing a gap update;
on the 10th turn, the master must begin to poll the gap, checking one
station each time it receives the token.
Gap Factor
Enter the number of times a master may retry a
transmission.
Retry Limit
Enter the anticipated time, in bit times, for one
token round on your network, including allowances for high and low
priority transactions, errors, and polling the gap.
Token Rotation (Ttr)
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-15
5.5
Defining Peerlink II Services
Peerlink II Services
The FMS CP module supports a maximum of 32 Peerlink II services, as
shown in Figure 5-9. The FMS CP module transmits and receives data (in
the form of peer blocks) to and from other SIMATIC 505 FMS CP modules
on your network on a scan-by-scan basis. When you click on Peerlink II
Services on the configuration tree, the COM5434 Configurator displays the
number of Transmit and Receive blocks available.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Click here.
Maximum Peer Blocks: 32
Module Local Configuration
Peer Transmit Blocks Available: 1
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Peer Receive Blocks Available: 31
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Peer Transmit Interval: 10
Peer Priority Factor: 8
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Figure 5-9 Peerlink II Services Available
To configure Peerlink II Services, define the desired transmission interval
and priority factor, and then configure the individual peer function blocks.
Enter a numeric value, from 0 to 65,535 (scan
cycles), to specify how often the Transmit peer block transmission is
attempted.
Peer Transmit Interval
Enter a numeric value, from 0 to 8, to specify the
priority for writing received peer data blocks to the PLC versus other
communications activities (e.g., FMS jobs). A factor of 8 specifies the
highest priority for received peer data, but still allows other activities if
no peer receives are pending. A factor of 0 is the lowest priority, but
still allows peer receives if no other activities are pending.
Peer Priority Factor
5-16
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Click the
New Item
button.
Peerlink II Services
P-P
FMS
FDL
peer_block_1
Peer Block Name: peer_block_1
Descriptor ID: 0
Peer Block Type: Receive
Local Address:
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Figure 5-10 Defining a Peer Block
Defining a Peer
Block
To define a peer block, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on Peerlink II Services on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar. A new peer block appears
in the configuration tree and the input fields change (see Figure 5-10).
3.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter a unique name, up to 32 characters, for the
peer block. (If you have selected Automatically Generate Names from
the Options menu, the COM5434 Configurator enters a name for the
peer block, but you can change it if you want.)
Peer Block Name
Enter a unique numeric value for each peer block. The
Descriptor ID is a method of identifying each peer block. The FMS CP
module uses this identifier to search for the peer blocks that the
module is configured to receive, and to encode the peer block that it is
configured to transmit. The valid range for this field is from 0 to 255.
Descriptor ID
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-17
Defining Peerlink II Services (continued)
Peer Block Type Select either Receive or Transmit for each peer block.
(Remember that each FMS CP module supports only one transmit
block and up to 31 receive blocks.)
Enter the location where the FMS CP module retrieves
data it is transmitting or stores data received during the job. The local
address consists of the programmable controller memory type
(V, K, X, Y, etc.), the starting address, and the number of locations (the
configurator automatically calculates them as a bit, byte, or word,
based on the memory type selection). When you click on the Local
Address field, a button appears. Click on the button, and the PLC
Memory Type Editor dialog box appears. Fill in the fields in the dialog
box to complete the local address. Then select OK.
Local Address
Figure 5-11 shows an example of the editor after the drum count preset
(DCP) memory type has been selected, which causes the Step # field to
appear.
PLC Memory Type Editor
Select PLC Memory Type, enter address offset, and then enter size of memory
for the specified type.
Enter a memory
type or select from
the drop-down list.
PLC Memory Types: DCP
Step #: 1
PLC Memory Address: 1
# of Locations: 1
Maximum data block size:
234 bytes (117 words)
OK
(Address Range: 1 to 2034)
(Location Format: WORD)
Cancel
Figure 5-11 PLC Memory Type Editor Dialog Box
5-18
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
5.6
Defining FMS Connections
FMS Connections
The FMS CP module supports up to 32 FMS connections, as shown in
Figure 5-12.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
Click here.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Maximum FMS Connections: 32
FMS Connections Used: 0
FMS Connections Available: 32
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Links to other Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS) devices
Figure 5-12 FMS Connections Available
This field displays the total number of FMS
connections supported by the FMS CP module.
Maximum FMS Connections
This field displays the number of FMS connections
that have been defined for the FMS CP module.
FMS Connections Used
FMS Connections Available
This field displays the total number of unused
FMS connections.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-19
Defining FMS Connections (continued)
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Name: fms_connection_1
Module Local Configuration
Click the
New Item
button.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FMS
FDL
fms_connection_1
FDL Connections
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local LSAP: 0
Remote Station Address: 0
Remote LSAP: 0
Max PDU Size TX high: 0
Max PDU Size TX low: 241
Max PDU Size RX high: 0
Max PDU Size RX low: 241
Data Transfer Type: Master-Master acyclic
Max Cnfmd. Svc. To: 1
Max Cnfmd. Svc. From: 1
Max UnCnfmd. Svc. To: 0
Max UnCnfmd. Svc. From: 0
Note: Use the scroll bar
buttons, if necessary, to
view additional fields.
Control Interval: 3000
Multiplier: 1
Password: 0
Access Groups: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Services Supported: Requester = rw, Responde
Links to other Fieldbus Message Specification FMS devices.
Figure 5-13 Defining FMS Connections
Defining an FMS
Connection
To define an FMS connection, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on FMS Connections on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar. An FMS connection
appears in the configuration tree and the input fields change (see
Figure 5-13).
3.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter a unique name, up to 32 characters, for each FMS
connection. (If you have selected Automatically Generate Names from
the Options menu, the COM5434 Configurator enters a name for you,
but you can change it if you want.)
Name
Enter a numeric value for the Link Service Access Point for
the FMS connection on the local FMS CP module. You cannot use the
same LSAP more than once per module. Choose a value between 2 and
62, except for 58 (refer to Table A-10 for LSAP assignment restrictions).
Local LSAP
5-20
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Remote Station Address
Enter the PROFIBUS network address used
by the remote device.
Enter a numeric value for the Link Service Access Point
for the FMS connection on the remote device. Choose a value between 2
and 62. You cannot use the same LSAP more than once at the same
remote station (refer to Table A-10 for LSAP assignments).
Remote LSAP
Specify the maximum number of bytes for
Protocol Data Units that can be sent on high priority transmissions.
Maximum PDU Size TX High
Specify the maximum number of bytes for
Protocol Data Units that can be sent on low priority transmissions.
Maximum PDU Size TX Low
Specify the maximum number of bytes for
Protocol Data Units that can be received on high priority receptions.
Maximum PDU Size RX High
Specify the maximum number of bytes for
Protocol Data Units that can be received on low priority receptions.
Maximum PDU Size RX Low
Select the type of data transfer and relationship
between the remote device and the FMS CP module. (See Table A-8 for
details on transfer types and jobs allowed.)
Data Transfer Type
Specify the maximum number of
confirmed concurrent services that can be sent to the remote station.
Maximum Confirmed Services To
Specify the maximum number of
confirmed concurrent services that can be received from the remote
station.
Maximum Confirmed Services From
Specify the maximum number of
unconfirmed concurrent services that can be sent to the remote station.
Maximum Unconfirmed Services To
Specify the maximum number of
unconfirmed concurrent services that can be received from the remote
station.
Maximum Unconfirmed Services From
Specify the maximum time allowed between
commands on the bus in 10 ms intervals.
Control Interval
Specify how many times this connection is entered into the
poll-list. A higher value gives this connection a higher priority relative
to other connections (used only for some master-slave connections).
Multiplier
Enter a numeric value as the password. This password, if
used, must match the password specified for the variable at the remote
partner. 0 = Access is possible for all FMS clients that specify a
password of 0. To specify access restricted by password, the valid range
is 1 to 255. Refer to Section 4.3 for more information.
Password
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-21
Defining FMS Connections (continued)
When you click on the Access Groups field, a button
appears in the field. Click on the button to view the Access Group
Rights dialog box (shown in Figure 5-14). Select the groups that have
access by clicking on the group boxes. Click on OK. The dialog box
disappears, and the selected groups are displayed in the Access Groups
field. (Refer to Section 4.3 for more information.)
Access Groups
Access Group Rights
Select access group rights for the current configuration.
Note: Access to a variable is
only possible when at least one
group number is selected to
match the setting on the partner.
Group #0
Group #4
Group #1
Group #5
Group #2
Group #6
Group #3
Group #7
OK
Cancel
Figure 5-14 FMS Access Group Rights Dialog Box
When you click on the Services Supported field, a
button appears in the field. Click on the button to view the Services
Supported dialog box (shown in Figure 5-15). Select the services by
clicking on the boxes, and then select OK. The dialog box disappears,
and the selected services are displayed in the corresponding field.
Services Supported
FMS Services Supported
Select the services supported by this FMS connection:
Requester: specify services
you expect from the partner.
Responder: specify services
you provide for the partner.
Requester:
Responder:
Read:
Write:
Information Report:
Get Object Dictionary:
Note: Access using
variable names is only
possible when the Get
Object Dictionary
service is selected.
OK
Cancel
Figure 5-15 FMS Services Supported Dialog Box
5-22
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
5.7
Defining FDL Connections
FDL Connections
The FMS CP module supports up to 32 FDL connections, as shown in
Figure 5-16. FDL connections are used for Send-Receive jobs.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Maximum FDL Connections: 32
Module Local Configuration
Click here
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
FDL Connections Used: 0
FDL Connections Available: 32
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Links to other Fieldbus Data Link (FDL) devices
Figure 5-16 FDL Connections Available
This field displays the total number of FDL
connections supported by the FMS CP module.
Maximum FDL Connections
This field displays the number of FDL connections
that have been defined for the FMS CP module.
FDL Connections Used
FDL Connections Available
This field displays the total number of unused
FDL connections.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-23
Defining FDL Connections (continued)
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
Click the
New Item
button.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
S-R
Name: fdl_connection_1
Remote Station Address: 0
Local LSAP: 0
Remote LSAP: 0
fdl_connection_1
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Links to other Fieldbus Data Link (FDL) devices
Figure 5-17 Defining FDL Connections
Defining an FDL
Connection
To define an FDL connection, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on FDL Connections on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar. An FDL connection
appears in the configuration tree and the input fields change (see
Figure 5-17).
3.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter a unique name for each FDL connection. (If you have
selected Automatically Generate Names from the Options menu, the
COM5434 Configurator enters a name for the connection, but you can
change it if you want.)
Name
Remote Station Address
Enter the PROFIBUS network address used
by the remote device.
5-24
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Enter a numeric value for the local Link Service Access
Point for the FDL connection on the local module. Choose a value
between 2 and 33. You cannot use the same local LSAP more than once.
Local LSAP
Enter a numeric value for the remote Link Service
Access Point for the FDL connection on the remote device. Choose a
value between 2 and 33. You cannot use the same remote LSAP more
than once per remote address.
Remote LSAP
If the value you select is assigned to a system function, you are prompted to
select another value.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-25
5.8
Overview of Communication Jobs
The FMS CP module supports a maximum of 48 communication jobs, as
shown in Figure 5-18. When you click on Communication Jobs on the
configuration tree, the COM5434 Configurator displays the number of each
type of communication job you have used, and the number of available
communication jobs remaining.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Click here.
Maximum Comm. Jobs: 48
FMS Jobs Used: 0
Send-Receive Jobs Used: 0
Comm. Jobs Available: 48
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Jobs triggered by setting the configured start bit
Figure 5-18 Communication Jobs
This field displays the number of
communication jobs supported by the FMS CP module.
Maximum Communication Jobs
This field displays the number of FMS jobs that have been
defined for the FMS CP module.
FMS Jobs Used
This field displays the number of Send-Receive
jobs that have been defined for the FMS CP module.
Send-Receive Jobs Used
Communication Jobs Available
This field displays the total number of
unused communication jobs.
5-26
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
5.9
Configuring FMS Jobs
FMS Jobs
Before you can configure an FMS job, you must have defined an FMS
connection between the local FMS CP module and the remote device (see
Section 5.6). Click on FMS Jobs on the configuration tree to see the number
of communication jobs available, as shown in Figure 5-19.
The FMS CP module supports five types of FMS communication jobs: Read,
Write, Information Report, Status, and Identify. For more detail on these
FMS jobs, see Section 4.3.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Maximum Comm. Jobs: 48
FMS Comm. Jobs: 0
Comm. Jobs Available: 48
Communication Jobs
Click here
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Configured Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS) protocol jobs
Figure 5-19 FMS Jobs Available
This field displays the total number of
communication jobs supported by the FMS CP module.
Maximum Communication Jobs
This field displays the number of FMS jobs that
have been defined for the FMS CP module.
FMS Communication Jobs
Communication Jobs Available
This field displays the total number of
unused communication jobs.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-27
Configuring FMS Jobs (continued)
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Job Name: fms_job_1
Module Local Configuration
Click the
New Item
button.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Start Bit: WY5.1
Job Type: Read
Connection: fms_connection_1
Status Word V: 0
Communication Jobs
FMS
FMS Jobs
FM
S
S–R
Local Address:
Variable Name or <Index>:
fms_job_1
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
FMS Job Types:
Access to Variable
By Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By Name + Subindex . . .
By Index + Subindex . . . .
Example
Engines
<100>
<Engines:2>
<100:2>
Reference name given to this job (must be unique)
Read
Write
Information Report
Status
Identify
Edit
Figure 5-20 Configuring FMS Jobs
Defining an FMS
Job
To define an FMS job, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on FMS Jobs on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar. An FMS job appears in the
configuration tree and the input fields change (see Figure 5-20).
3.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter a unique name for each FMS job. (If you have
selected Automatically Generate Names from the Options menu, the
COM5434 Configurator enters a name for the FMS job, but you can
change it if you want.)
Job Name
Each FMS job requires a start bit to trigger the job. The start
bit for each job must be unique. When you select a start bit for the job
from the drop-down menu in the Start Bit field, that bit is no longer
available as a selectable bit for other jobs. (The corresponding “job
active” bit is automatically assigned when you select the start bit.)
Start Bit
5-28
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Select Read, Write, Information Report, Status, or Identify
from the drop-down list. (See Section 4.3 for descriptions of the FMS job
types.)
Job Type
Connection Select an FMS connection that you have previously
defined in the FMS Connections branch of the configuration tree. The
COM5434 Configurator automatically lists your connection choices in a
drop-down menu.
The status word is a memory location in V-memory
which is updated each time a job completes. This allows you to check
the status of each job you configure. If you specify a value of zero in this
field, job status is not reported to a status word. (You can examine the
status of job communications by selecting the menu command
Diagnostics → Job Status.)
Status Word V
Enter the location where the FMS CP module retrieves
the data it is transmitting or stores the data it receives during the job.
The local address consists of the programmable controller memory type
(V, K, X, Y, etc.), the starting address, and the number of locations (the
configurator automatically calculates them as a bit, byte, or word,
based on the memory type selection). When you click on the Local
Address field, a button appears. Click on the button, and the dialog box
shown in Figure 5-21 appears. Fill in the fields in the dialog box to
complete the local address. Then select OK. (You can also enter an
address manually; for example, V1, 1.)
Local Address
PLC Memory Type Editor
Select PLC Memory Type, enter address offset, and then enter size of memory
for the specified type.
Enter a memory
type or select from
the drop-down list.
PLC Memory Types:
PLC Memory Address: 1
# of Locations: 1
Maximum variable size:
237 bytes or 118 words
OK
Cancel
Figure 5-21 PLC Memory Type Editor Dialog Box
Enter the variable name or variable index
where the remote device stores the data that is transmitted during the
job. You can also specify a subindex by using a colon (:) followed by the
element number of the variable (user data type or array); for example,
<100:2> indicates the second element of variable 100.
Variable Name or <Index>
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-29
5.10
Configuring Send-Receive Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
Before you can configure a Send-Receive job, you must have defined an FDL
connection between the local FMS CP module and the remote device (see
Section 5.7). The FMS CP module supports 48 communication jobs, which
may be a combination of FMS and Send-Receive jobs. Click on Send-Receive
Jobs on the configuration tree to see the number of communication jobs
available, as shown in Figure 5-22.
For more detail on these jobs, see Section 4.4.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Maximum Comm. Jobs: 48
Send-Receive Jobs: 0
Comm. Jobs Available: 48
Communication Jobs
FMS
Click here.
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Configured Fieldbus Data Link (FDL) protocol jobs
Figure 5-22 Send-Receive Jobs
This field displays the total number of
communication jobs supported by the FMS CP module.
Maximum Communication Jobs
This field displays the number of Send-Receive jobs that
have been defined for the FMS CP module.
Send-Receive Jobs
Communication Jobs Available
This field displays the total number of
unused communication jobs.
5-30
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
Click the New Item
button, or, with
Send-Receive Jobs
selected, click the
right mouse button
and select New Item.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
Job Name: sr_job_1
Start Bit: WY5.2
Job Type: Receive
FDL Connection: fdl_connection_1
Status Word V: 1
Local Address #1:
FMS
FMS Jobs
Local Address #2:
S–R
Send-Receive Jobs
Local Address #3:
S-R
sr_job_1
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local Address #4:
Local Address #5:
Local Address #6:
Local Address #7:
Local Address #8:
Reference name given to this job (must be unique)
Edit
Figure 5-23 Configuring Send-Receive Jobs
Defining a
Send-Receive Job
To define a Send-Receive job, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on Send-Receive Jobs on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar. A Send-Receive job
appears in the configuration tree and the input fields change (see
Figure 5-23).
3.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter a unique name for each Send-Receive job. (If you
have selected Automatically Generate Names from the Options menu,
the COM5434 Configurator enters a name for the job, but you can
change it if you want.)
Job Name
Each Send-Receive job requires a start bit to trigger the job.
The start bit for each job must be unique. When you select a start bit
for the job from the drop-down menu, that bit is no longer available as
a selectable bit for other jobs. (The corresponding “job active” bit is
automatically assigned when you select the start bit.)
Start Bit
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-31
Configuring Send-Receive Jobs (continued)
Select Send or Receive from the drop-down list.
Job Type
Select an FDL connection that you have previously
defined. The COM5434 Configurator automatically lists your
connection choices.
FDL Connection
The Status Word is a memory location in V memory
which is updated each time a job completes. This allows you to check
the status of each job you configure. If you specify a value of zero in this
field, job status is not reported to a status word. (You can examine the
status of job communications by selecting the menu command
Diagnostics → Job Status.)
Status Word V
Enter the address for each location where the
FMS CP module retrieves the data it is transmitting or stores the data
it receives during the job. Each local address consists of the
programmable controller memory type (V, K, X, Y, etc.), the starting
address, and the number of locations (the configurator automatically
calculates them as a bit, byte, or word, based on the memory type
selection). The total number of bytes of all the memory locations added
together cannot exceed 240 bytes.
Local Address #n
When you click on one of the Local Address fields, a button appears.
Click on the button, and the dialog box shown in Figure 5-24 appears.
Fill in the fields in the dialog box to complete the local address. Then
select OK. (You can also enter an address manually; for example, V1, 1.)
PLC Memory Type Editor
Select PLC Memory Type, enter address offset, and then enter size of memory
for the specified type.
Enter a memory
type or select from
the drop-down list.
PLC Memory Types:
PLC Memory Address: 1
# of Locations: 1
Note: Maximum data size:
240 bytes (120 words) total
for all addresses combined.
OK
Cancel
Figure 5-24 PLC Memory Type Editor Dialog Box
5-32
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
5.11
Creating FMS Data Types
FMS Data Types
The FMS CP module supports up to 85 FMS data types. You can construct a
user data type to hold a combination of information types, and then define a
variable that uses that special data type.
Click on FMS Data Types on the configuration tree to see the number of
user data types available, as shown in Figure 5-25.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Max. User Data Types: 85
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
User Data Types Used: 0
User Data Types Available: 85
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
Click here.
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
User defined variable data type definitions
Figure 5-25 FMS Data Types Available
This field displays the total number of FMS user
data types that are supported by the FMS CP module.
Maximum User Data Types
User Data Types Used
This field displays the number of user data types that
have been created.
User Data Types Available
This field displays the number of user data types
that can be constructed.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-33
Creating FMS Data Types (continued)
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
Click the New Item
button, or, with FMS
Data Types selected,
click the right mouse
button and select
New Item.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Name: user_data_type_1
Length (bytes): 0
Definition: {
}
Communication Jobs
DTs
FMS
FMS Jobs
S–R
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
user_data_type_1
FMS Variables
Reference name given to this job (must be unique)
Edit
Figure 5-26 Creating a User Data Type
Creating a User
Data Type
To create a User Data Type, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on FMS Data Types on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar. A User Data Type appears
in the configuration tree and the input fields change (see Figure 5-26).
3.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter a unique name for each user data type. (If you have
selected Automatically Generate Names from the Options menu, the
COM5434 Configurator enters a name for the data type, but you can
change it if you want.)
Name
Length (bytes) The length of the data type you create is determined by
the combination of pre-defined types you select. The COM5434
Configurator automatically calculates this information for you after you
define the user data type.
5-34
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
When you click on the Definition field, a button appears.
Click on the button to bring up the User Data Type Editor dialog box
(shown in Figure 5-27). Use the drop-down list of available data types
together with the insert or delete buttons to build your data type
definition. Then click on OK in the dialog box to complete the User
Data Type. (Refer to Section A.3 for more details on data types.)
Definition
User Data Type Editor
Data Type Definition:
{
BOOLEAN;
User Data Types are defined by inserting
components from existing system data
types to create a new data type.
}
Available Data Types:
BOOLEAN
After inserting two or
more data types, you
can use the arrow
buttons to move a
selected data type up
or down in the list.
Insert
Delete
OK
System Data Types:
BOOLEAN
INTEGER16
INTEGER32
UNSIGNED8
UNSIGNED16
UNSIGNED32
FLOAT
OCTET STRING
BIT STRING
Cancel
Use “Insert” button
to add each
selected data type
to the definition.
Figure 5-27 User Data Type Editor Dialog Box
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-35
5.12
Creating FMS Variables
FMS Variables
The FMS CP module supports up to 100 FMS variables.
Click on FMS Variables on the configuration tree to see the number of
variables available, as shown in Figure 5-28.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Module Local Configuration
Maximum FMS Variables: 100
FMS Variables Used: 0
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS Variables Available: 100
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
Click here to select
FMS Variables.
S–R
DTs
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
Memory assignments to system and user variable data types
Figure 5-28 FMS Variables Available
This field displays the total number of FMS
variables that are supported by the FMS CP module.
Maximum FMS Variables
FMS Variables Used
This field displays the number of FMS variables that
have been created.
FMS Variables Available
This field displays the number of FMS variables
that can be constructed.
5-36
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
<no description>
Name: variable_1
Module Local Configuration
Click the New Item
button, or, with FMS
Variables selected,
click the right
mouse button and
select New Item.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
DTs
FMS
FMS Jobs
S–R
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
100 - variable_1
Index: 100
PLC Memory:
Access Rights: RD=..a WR=..a
Access Groups: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Password: 0
Data Type: BOOLEAN
Data Type Length (bytes): 1
Variable Array: No
Array Elements: 0
Info. Report Receiver?: Yes
Connection: fms_connection_1
Use Index?: No
Index number can be
used instead of name.
Sub Index: 0
Reference name of this variable
Edit
Figure 5-29 Defining FMS Variables
Defining an FMS
Variable
To define an FMS variable, follow the steps below:
1.
Click on FMS Variables on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar. An FMS Variable appears
in the configuration tree and the input fields change (see Figure 5-29).
3.
Fill in the following fields in the input pane:
Enter a unique name for each FMS variable. (If you have
selected Automatically Generate Names from the Options menu, the
COM5434 Configurator enters a name for the variable, but you can
change it if you want.) This name is added to the Object Dictionary
generated by the software.
Name
This field displays the index number (from 15 to 65535) that is
automatically assigned to each FMS variable, but you can change it if
you want. This index number is added to the Object Dictionary
generated by the software.
Index
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-37
Creating FMS Variables (continued)
When you click on the PLC Memory field, a button
appears in the field. Click on the button to view the PLC Memory Type
Editor dialog box (shown in Figure 5-30). Select a PLC memory type
from the top drop-down menu, enter a PLC memory address in the
bottom field, and then select OK. The dialog box disappears, and the
PLC memory address is displayed in the PLC Memory field.
PLC Memory
PLC Memory Type Editor
Select PLC Memory Type, and then enter address offset.
Enter a memory
type or select from
the drop-down list.
PLC Memory Types:
PLC Memory Address: 1
OK
Cancel
Figure 5-30 PLC Memory Editor Dialog Box
When you click on this field, a button appears in the
field. Click on the button to view the Variable Access Rights dialog box
(shown in Figure 5-31). Click on the boxes to configure access privileges
for this variable, and then select OK. The dialog box disappears, and
the selected privileges are displayed in the Access Rights field. (Refer
also to Table A-9 for more information about access rights.)
Access Rights
Variable Access Rights
Access by Password:
Read
Select access rights
for this variable.
Write
Access by Groups:
OK
Read
Write
Cancel
Access by All:
Read
Write
Figure 5-31 FMS Variable Access Rights Dialog Box
5-38
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
When you click on the Access Groups field, a button
appears in the field. Click on the button to view the Variable Access
Groups dialog box (shown in Figure 5-32). Define which groups can
have access to the variable by clicking on the group boxes, and then
select OK. The dialog box disappears, and the selected groups are
displayed in the Access Groups field. (Refer to Section 4.3 for more
information about access groups.)
Access Groups
Variable Access Groups
Select all groups that will have access to this variable.
Note: Access groups, if any are
disabled (deselected), allow
access only by remote partners
which have been assigned to
the matching groups.
Group #0
Group #4
Group #1
Group #5
Group #2
Group #6
Group #3
Group #7
OK
Cancel
Figure 5-32 FMS Variable Access Groups Dialog Box
Enter a numeric value as the password required to access
the FMS variable. This password, if used, limits access to a remote
partner specifying the same password. (Refer to Section 4.3 for more
information about passwords.)
Password
Select a data type for the variable from the drop-down
menu. (FMS data types that you create appear in the list along with
the standard FMS data types.) Refer to Section A.3 for more details on
data types.
Data Type
The length of the FMS variable you create is
automatically entered into this field by the COM5434 Configurator. If
the data type is a string type (octet or bit), enter a value here.
Data Type Length (bytes)
Select whether the data type is an array of the selected
type or a simple data type by selecting Yes or No.
Variable Array
If the data type is an array, this field shows the
number of elements contained in the array.
Array Elements
Select Yes to specify that the variable can be
used to receive Information Reports.
Info. Report Receiver?
Specify which connection is allowed to send Information
Reports to this variable.
Connection
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-39
Creating FMS Variables (continued)
Select Yes to specify that the Information Report is to be
stored as an index, or select No to store it by name.
Use Index?
You can specify an element number if the variable is an
array or a structure (if the structure is not an array). For example, if
your variable consists of an array of 10 elements of data type
INTEGER16, a subindex value of 4 specifies the fourth 16-bit integer in
the variable array.
Sub Index
5-40
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
5.13
Saving and Downloading the Configuration
Validating
and Saving the
Configuration to
a File
You can save your configuration to a file before you download the file to the
FMS CP module. To save a configuration, follow these steps:
1.
To ensure that all configuration parameters are valid before saving,
select the menu command Transfer → Validate Configuration Now or
click on the Validate button:
Correct any invalid parameters as described by each error message.
2.
Select the menu command File → Save As... or click on the Save
button:
3.
Use the drop-down list box at the top of the Save As dialog to select a
directory to store the saved file.
4.
Enter a file name, as shown in Figure 5-33.
5.
Click on Save.
Save As
Save in:
Configsw
Name
Size Type
Modified
File_ABC.fms
41KB COM5434 Configuration File
9/15/97 11:28 AM
Testfile1.fms
127KB COM5434 Configuration File
10/31/97 11:59 PM
Click here for
file details.
Enter name here.
File name:
File_A.fms
Save as type:
COM5434 Configuration Files (*.fms)
Save
Cancel
Figure 5-33 Saving Your Configuration to a File
NOTE: Be sure to save your configuration for each module in a safe place,
according to your company’s requirements. In case a module ever fails, you
will need your archived configuration file to configure the replacement
module exactly as the original module.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-41
Saving and Downloading the Configuration (continued)
Printing the
Configuration
Downloading the
Configuration to
the FMS CP Module
It is always a good practice to produce and archive accurate documentation
for each configuration. A printed record of your configuration is one way to
do this. To print the complete configuration or selected parts of it, follow
these steps:
1.
Validate and save the configuration, as described on page 5-41.
2.
Select the menu command File → Print... or click on the
3.
The Print dialog allows you to select all (the default) or part of the
configuration for printing. Select the sections you want to print.
4.
Click on OK.
button.
After validating and saving your configuration file, you can download it to
the FMS CP module.
!
WARNING
Downloading a configuration to an FMS CP module on line in a network will
cause interruption of network communications with that module only. If the
download is successful, network communications will resume after the module
returns to RUN mode.
Any interruption to network communications could cause unpredictable
machine or process operation, possibly resulting in death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
To avoid problems resulting from interruption of network communications,
design your installation to tolerate interruptions in network communications,
and/or stop your process in a safe state before you download configurations to
any network FMS CP module.
!
WARNING
If you download new Module Local Configuration parameters (such as station
address and network baud rate) to a module in an active network, and the new
parameters are not compatible with the network configuration already in use,
the download operation may be unsuccessful and could cause a disruption in
the network communications.
Disrupting network communications could cause unpredictable machine or
process operation, possibly resulting in death or serious injury to personnel,
and/or damage to equipment.
To avoid a download failure and a disruption in network communications, stop
your process in a safe state and disconnect the PROFIBUS cable from the
FMS CP module before downloading new module configuration parameters.
Reconnect the module to the network and ensure proper network operation
before reactivating your process.
5-42
Using the COM5434 Configurator
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
To download a configuration to the FMS CP module, follow these steps:
1.
Make sure that the programming cable is connected between the serial
port on your PC and the RS-232 port on the FMS CP module, and that
the baud rate setting in the software matches the jumper-selected baud
rate on the module, (see Section 2.2 and Figure 5-3).
2.
Select the menu command Transfer → Download to the CP5434, or
click on the Download button:
3.
If the module is currently configured, select Yes on the information
message to overwrite the existing configuration with the new one.
4.
Click on OK.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using the COM5434 Configurator
5-43
Chapter 6
Configuration Examples
6.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6.2
Example of an FMS Read Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Tasks for an FMS Read Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Module Local Configuration for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Connection for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the FMS Read Job for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Connection for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FMS Variable for Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example RLL Code for FMS Read Job at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-12
6-12
6.3
Example of a Send-Receive Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Tasks for a Send-Receive Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FDL Connection for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Send Job for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an FDL Connection for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Receive Job for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example RLL Code for Send Job at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example RLL Code for Receive Job at Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Successful Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsuccessful Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-19
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-26
6-27
6.4
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Tasks for a Peerlink II Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Transmit Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Receive Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Configuration File for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Module Local Configuration for Station 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Transmit Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Peerlink II Receive Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration File to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the Configuration to the FMS CP Module at Station 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-33
6-33
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-38
6-39
6-39
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-1
6.1
Overview
This chapter describes how to define connections and jobs for the FMS CP
module using the COM5434 Configurator. Several configuration examples
are provided. The configuration examples are based on the example network
shown in Figure 6-1.
Station 1
P/S
P/S
545
CPU
P/S
575
CPU
RBC
FMS
CP
FMS
CP
Station 2
CP
S7-400
Station 3
PC with COM5434
software
Station 6
Station 4
Station 5
P/S
545
CPU
FMS
CP
CP
S7-400
PC with
CP5412 card
Figure 6-1 Example Network
6-2
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Figure 6-2 shows the configuration tasks you must complete to configure the
FMS CP module using the COM5434 Configurator.
Configure the local FMS CP module using the COM5434 Configurator.
Create and name the configuration file.
Define the Module Local Configuration.
Define an FMS
connection.
Define a Peerlink II
Service.
Define an FDL
connection.
Configure an
FMS job.
Save and download
the configuration file.
Configure a Send
or Receive job.
Save and download
the configuration file.
Save and download
the configuration file.
Configure the remote
(FDL) device using its
programming tool, or...
...if the remote device is using an FMS CP module, then...
Configure the remote FMS CP module
using the COM5434 Configurator.
...if the remote device is using an FMS CP module, then...
Create and name the configuration file.
Configure the remote FMS CP module
using the COM5434 Configurator.
Define the Module Local Configuration.
Create and name the configuration file.
Define an FMS
connection.
Define the Module Local Configuration.
Define an FDL
connection.
Configure variable
and data type.
Configure a Receive
or Send Job.
Save and download
the configuration file.
Save and download
the configuration file.
Figure 6-2 Configuration Tasks
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-3
6.2
Example of an FMS Read Job
Figure 6-3 shows the flow of data during an FMS Read job configured
between Station 1 (FMS CP) and Station 2 (FMS CP) on the example
network. Station 1 is the client and initiates the request for data. Station 2
is the server, responding to the request with a transfer of data from the
FMS variable specified by Station 1.
Data Flow
Station 2
Read (FMS variable)
Read response (data)
CPU
FMS CP
Data to memory
CPU
FMS CP
Station 1
Data from memory
Figure 6-3 Data Flow for FMS Read Example
Configuration Tasks
for an FMS Read
Job
Using the COM5434 Configurator, configure the FMS Read job between
Station 1 and Station 2 by completing the following tasks:
Create and name the configuration file for Station 1.
Define the Module Local Configuration for Station 1.
Define an FMS connection for Station 1.
Configure an FMS Read job for Station 1.
Save and download the configuration file to the FMS CP module at
Station 1.
THEN...
Create and name the configuration file for Station 2.
Define the Module Local Configuration for Station 2.
Define an FMS connection for Station 2 using the same addressing as
the connection created for Station 1.
Define an FMS variable.
Save and download the configuration file to the FMS CP module at
Station 2.
These tasks are described in detail on the following pages.
6-4
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Creating the
Configuration File
for Station 1
The first step in the process is to create the configuration file. Click on the
top icon of the configuration tree, which says <no description>. Then enter a
description for this file in the Description field, as shown below and in
Figure 6-4.
Description:
File_A
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Click here.
File_A
Description: File_A
Module Local Configuration
File Name: UNTITLED
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Directory:
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Modified?: NO
FDL
Enter description
here.
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
Last Saved File:
Last Saved Directory:
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Edit
Current configuration file specification
Figure 6-4 Creating a Configuration File
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-5
Example of an FMS Read Job (continued)
Defining the
Module Local
Configuration for
Station 1
Next, you must define the Module Local Configuration of the FMS CP
module for Station 1.
1.
Click on the Module Local Configuration icon.
2.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-5) to define the
Module Local Configuration:
Local Station Address:
1
Highest Station Address:
Bus Parameter Profile:
Baud Rate:
15
FMS-DP Universal
1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token):
# of Slaves (no token):
6
0
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
File_A
Click here.
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
Enter parameters
here.
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local Station Address: 1
Highest Station Address: 15
Bus Parameter Profile: FMS-DP Universal
Baud Rate: 1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token): 6
# of Slaves (no token): 0
Slot Time (Tslot): 3000
Max. Sta. Delay (Max_Tsdr): 980
Min. Sta. Delay (Min_Tsdr): 150
Setup Time (Tset): 240
Quiet Time (Tqui): 0
Gap Factor: 50
Retry Limit: 1
Token Rotation (Ttr): 45000
This module’s FMS PROFIBUS communication parameters
Edit
Figure 6-5 Module Local Configuration Example
6-6
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Defining an FMS
Connection for
Station 1
Continue configuring the FMS Read job by defining the FMS connection for
the FMS CP module at Station 1.
1.
Click on the FMS Connections icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-6) to define the
FMS connection for Station 1:
Name:
pumpconnect
Local LSAP:
3
Remote Station Address:
Remote LSAP:
2
5
Leave the remaining fields at their default values.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
File_A
Name: pumpconnect
Module Local Configuration
Click the
New Item
button.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FMS
FDL
pumpconnect
FDL Connections
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Enter parameters in the first
four fields; leave the additional
fields at their default values.
Local LSAP: 3
Remote Station Address: 2
Remote LSAP: 5
Max PDU Size TX high: 0
Max PDU Size TX low: 241
Max PDU Size RX high: 0
Max PDU Size RX low: 241
Data Transfer Type: Master-Master, acyclic
Max Cnfmd. Svc. To: 1
Max Cnfmd. Svc. From: 1
Max UnCnfmd. Svc. To: 0
Max UnCnfmd. Svc. From: 0
Control Interval: 3000
Multiplier: 1
Password: 0
Access Groups: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Services Supported: Requester = rw, Respond
Edit
Links to other Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS) devices.
Figure 6-6 Defining an FMS Connection Example
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-7
Example of an FMS Read Job (continued)
Configuring the
FMS Read Job for
Station 1
Once you have defined the Module Local Configuration and the FMS
connection, you can configure the FMS Read job for Station 1.
1.
Click on the FMS Jobs icon on the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-7) to configure
the FMS Read job.
Job Name:
Start Bit:
pump_1
WY5.2
Job Type:
Read
Connection:
pumpconnect
Status Word V:
1
Local Address:
V100,10
Variable Name or <Index>:
<100>
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
File_A
Job Name: pump_1
Module Local Configuration
Click the
New Item
button.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Start Bit: WY5.2
Job Type: Read
Connection: pumpconnect
Status Word V: 1
Communication Jobs
FMS
FMS Jobs
FM
S
S–R
...
Local Address: V100, 10
Variable Name or <Index>: <100>
pump_1
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Enter parameters
here.
With the cursor in the Local Address field,
click the button that appears on the right to
access the memory address editor dialog.
Reference name given to this job (must be unique)
Edit
Figure 6-7 FMS Read Job Example
6-8
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Saving the
Configuration File
to Disk
Save your file to disk before attempting to transfer the file to the FMS CP
module. Follow these steps:
1.
Select the menu command File → Save As... or click on the Save
button:
2.
Select a directory to store the saved file.
3.
Enter a file name, as shown in Figure 6-8.
4.
Click on Save.
Save As
Save in:
Configsw
Name
Size Type
Modified
File_ABC.fms
41KB COM5434 Configuration File
9/15/97 11:28 AM
Testfile1.fms
127KB COM5434 Configuration File
10/31/97 11:59 PM
Click here for
file details.
Enter name here.
File name:
File_A.fms
Save as type:
COM5434 Configuration Files (*.fms)
Save
Cancel
Figure 6-8 Save As Dialog
Transferring the
Configuration to
the FMS CP Module
at Station 1
After saving your configuration file, download it to the FMS CP module at
Station 1 by following these steps:
1.
Select the menu command Transfer → Download to the CP5434, or
click on the Download button:
2.
Click on OK.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-9
Example of an FMS Read Job (continued)
Creating the
Configuration File
for Station 2
After you configure the FMS Read job for Station 1, you need to create a
configuration file for Station 2 by following these steps:
1.
Select the menu command File → New to create an empty
configuration file.
2.
Enter a description for this file in the Description field, as shown below:
Description:
Setting the Module
Local
Configuration for
Station 2
File_AB
Next, you must define the Module Local Configuration of the FMS CP
module at Station 2.
1.
Click on the Module Local Configuration icon.
2.
Complete the fields listed below to define the Module Local
Configuration for Station 2.
Local Station Address:
2
Highest Station Address:
Bus Parameter Profile:
Baud Rate:
15
FMS-DP Universal
1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token):
# of Slaves (no token):
Defining an FMS
Connection for
Station 2
6
0
Continue configuring the FMS Read job by defining the FMS connection for
the FMS CP module at Station 2.
1.
Click on the FMS Connections icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below to define the FMS connection for
Station 2:
Name:
Pump
Local LSAP:
5
Remote Station Address:
Remote LSAP:
1
3
Leave the remaining fields at their default values.
6-10
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Defining an FMS
Variable for
Station 2
Continue configuring the FMS Read job by defining an FMS variable for the
FMS CP module at Station 2.
1.
Click on the FMS Variables icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-9) to define the
FMS variable for Station 2:
Name:
PumpControl
PLC Memory:
Data Type:
V200
UNSIGNED16
Variable Array:
Yes
Array Elements:
10
Leave the remaining fields at their default values.
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
File_AB
Name: PumpControl
Module Local Configuration
Click the New Item
button, or, with FMS
Variables selected,
click the right
mouse button and
select New Item.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
DTs
FMS
FMS Jobs
S–R
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
100 - PumpControl
PLC Memory: V200
Access Rights: RD=..a WR=..a
Access Groups: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Password: 0
Data Type: UNSIGNED16
Data Type Length (bytes): 2
Variable Array: Yes
Array Elements: 10
Info. Report Receiver?: No
Connection: Pump
Use Index?: No
Index number is assigned
automatically by the software.
Sub Index:
Reference name of this variable
0
Edit
Figure 6-9 Defining an FMS Variable
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-11
Example of an FMS Read Job (continued)
Saving the
Configuration File
to Disk
Transferring the
Configuration to
the FMS CP Module
at Station 2
Example RLL Code
for FMS Read Job
at Station 1
Save your file to disk before attempting to transfer the file to the FMS CP
module. Follow these steps:
1.
Select the menu command File → Save As... or click on the Save
button:
2.
Select a directory to store the saved file.
3.
Enter a file name.
4.
Click on Save.
After saving your configuration file, download it to the FMS CP module at
Station 2 by following these steps:
1.
Disconnect the programming cable from the FMS CP module at
Station 1, and reconnect the cable to the RS-232 port on the FMS CP
module at Station 2.
2.
Select the menu command Transfer → Download to the CP5434, or
click on the Download button:
3.
Click on OK.
The Relay Ladder Logic example in Figure 6-10 demonstrates a typical
scenario for using the FMS Read service of the FMS CP module. This
section assumes that you are familiar with Series 505 programmable logic
controller language.
NOTE: If the Read job is to be executed only one time, you must take
appropriate action to disable Xn after the data transfer has been made.
NOTE: This relay ladder logic assumes good transactions, and does not
contain status word checking. Error recovery must be implemented in
ladder logic appropriate to your application. The WX and WY locations used
in this RLL example correspond to module I/O addresses that have been
configured in programmable logic controller memory using the Configure
I/O function in TISOFT.
6-12
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
C99
Xn
Enabling Rung (user logic)
C99
BITP1
A: WX1
N=2
C99
BITP2
A: WY5
N=2
C100
C21
BITP1 And BITP2 verify that no previous jobs are in progress prior to
setting the Read Job Start Bit.
C100
After the Read Job Start Bit is set, BITP1 and BITP2 verify that the
Read Job is active prior to resetting the Job Start Bit in BITP1.
C21
BITC1
A: WY5
N=2
C100
C21
BITS1
A: WY5
N=2
Communication Reset: clears the Read Job Start Bit, as
defined by bit 2 of word output WY5.
Beginning Communication Rung: Sets the Read Job Start Bit, C23
as defined by bit 2 of word output WY5.
Enable TMR1 with BITS1 and hold with BITP2 until the
FMS CP sets WX Job Active Bit or TMR1 expires.
C21
C22
C24
C23
C24
TMR1
BITC2
TMR1 and BITC2 act as a WY Start Bit reset
in cases where the FMS CP powers up with
C25
WY Start Bit high (see note on page 4-5).
A: WY5
N=2
C25
C100
P= 30.0
END
Figure 6-10 FMS Read Job Relay Ladder Logic for Station 1
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-13
6.3
Example of a Send-Receive Job
Figure 6-11 shows the flow of data during Send-Receive jobs configured
between Station 1 (FMS CP) and Station 5 (FMS CP) on the example
network. Station 1 sends the data. Station 5 receives the data from
Station 1.
Data Flow
Station 5
Send (data only)
Acknowledge
CPU
FMS CP
Data from memory
CPU
FMS CP
Station 1
Job: Receive
Data to memory
Note: Both programmable logic controllers must have RLL code to allow data to be transferred.
Figure 6-11 Send-Receive Job Data Flow Example
Configuration Tasks
for a Send-Receive
Job
Using the COM5434 Configurator, configure the Send and Receive jobs
between Station 1 and Station 5 by completing the following tasks:
Create and name the configuration file for Station 1.
Define the Module Local Configuration for Station 1.
Define an FDL connection for Station 1.
Configure the Send job for Station 1.
Save and download the configuration file to the FMS CP module at
Station 1.
THEN...
Create and name the configuration file for Station 5.
Define the Module Local Configuration for Station 5.
Define an FDL connection for Station 5 using the same addressing as
the connection created for Station 1.
Configure the Receive job for Station 5.
Save and download the configuration file to the FMS CP module at
Station 5.
These tasks are described in detail on the following pages.
6-14
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Creating the
Configuration File
for Station 1
The first step in the process is to create the configuration file.
1.
Select the menu command File → New to create an empty
configuration file.
2.
Enter a description for this file in the Description field, as shown below
(and in Figure 6-12):
Description:
File_B
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Click here.
File_B
Description: File_B
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Enter description
here.
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
File Name: UNTITLED
Directory:
Modified?: NO
Last Saved File:
Last Saved Directory:
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Edit
Current configuration file specification
Figure 6-12 Creating a Configuration File
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-15
Example of a Send-Receive Job (continued)
Setting the Module
Local
Configuration for
Station 1
Next, you must define the Module Local Configuration of the FMS CP
module for Station 1.
1.
Click on the Module Local Configuration icon.
2.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-13) to define
the Module Local Configuration:
Local Station Address:
1
Highest Station Address:
Bus Parameter Profile:
Baud Rate:
15
FMS-DP Universal
1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token):
# of Slaves (no token):
6
0
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
File_A
Click here.
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
Enter parameters
here.
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local Station Address: 1
Highest Station Address: 15
Bus Parameter Profile: FMS-DP Universal
Baud Rate: 1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token): 6
# of Slaves (no token): 0
Slot Time (Tslot): 3000
Max. Sta. Delay (Max_Tsdr): 980
Min. Sta. Delay (Min_Tsdr): 150
Setup Time (Tset): 240
Quiet Time (Tqui): 0
Gap Factor: 50
Retry Limit: 1
Token Rotation (Ttr): 45000
This module’s FMS PROFIBUS communication parameters
Edit
Figure 6-13 Module Local Configuration Example
6-16
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Defining an FDL
Connection for
Station 1
Continue configuring the Send job for Station 1 by defining the FDL
connection for the FMS CP module at Station 1.
1.
Click on the FDL Connections icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-14) to define
the FDL connection for Station 1.
Name:
Motor
Remote Station Address:
Local LSAP:
5
4
Remote LSAP:
5
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
File_B
Name: Motor
Module Local Configuration
Click the
New Item
button.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
S-R
Remote Station Address: 5
Local LSAP: 4
Remote LSAP: 5
Motor
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Enter parameters
here.
Links to other Fieldbus Data Link (FDL) devices
Edit
Figure 6-14 FDL Connection for Station 1
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-17
Example of a Send-Receive Job (continued)
Configuring the
Send Job for
Station 1
Once you have defined the Module Local Configuration and the FDL
connection, you can configure a Send job for Station 1.
1.
Click on the Send-Receive Jobs icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-15) to
configure the Send job for Station 1.
Job Name:
Start Bit:
Motorsend
WY5.3
Job Type:
Send
FDL Connection:
Status Word V:
Motor
6
Local Address #1:
V101,2
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
File_B
Job Name: Motorsend
Module Local Configuration
Click the New Item
button, or, with
Send-Receive Jobs
selected, click the
right mouse button
and select New Item.
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
Start Bit: WY5.3
Job Type: Send
FDL Connection: Motor
Status Word V: 6
Local Address #1: V101, 2
FMS
FMS Jobs
Local Address #2:
S–R
Send-Receive Jobs
Local Address #3:
Motorsend
Local Address #4:
S-R
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local Address #5:
Local Address #6:
Local Address #7:
Local Address #8:
Enter parameters
here.
Reference name given to this job (must be unique)
Edit
Figure 6-15 Send Job for Station 1
6-18
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Saving the
Configuration File
to Disk
Transferring the
Configuration to
the FMS CP Module
at Station 1
You should save your file to disk before attempting to transfer the file to the
FMS CP module. To save the file to disk, follow these steps:
1.
Select the menu command File → Save As... or click on the Save
button:
2.
Select a directory to store the saved file.
3.
Enter a file name.
4.
Click on Save.
After saving your configuration file, download it to the FMS CP module at
Station 1 by following these steps:
1.
Select the menu command Transfer → Download to the CP5434, or
click on the Download button:
2.
Click on OK.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-19
Example of a Send-Receive Job (continued)
Creating the
Configuration File
for Station 5
After you create a Send job for Station 1, you need to create a configuration
file for Station 5.
1.
Select the menu command File → New to create an empty
configuration file.
2.
Enter a description for this file in the Description field as shown below:
Description:
Setting the Module
Local
Configuration for
Station 5
File_BA
Next, you must define the Module Local Configuration of the FMS CP
module at Station 5.
1.
Click on the Module Local Configuration icon.
2.
Complete the fields listed below to define the Module Local
Configuration for Station 5:
Local Station Address:
5
Highest Station Address:
Bus Parameter Profile:
Baud Rate:
15
FMS-DP Universal
1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token):
# of Slaves (no token):
Defining an FDL
Connection for
Station 5
0
Continue configuring the Receive job for Station 5 by defining the FDL
connection for the FMS CP module at Station 5.
1.
Click on the FDL Connections icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below to define the FDL connection for
Station 5:
Name:
Motor
Remote Station Address:
Local LSAP:
Configuration Examples
1
5
Remote LSAP:
6-20
6
4
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuring the
Receive Job for
Station 5
Once you have defined the Module Local Configuration and the FDL
connection, you can configure a Receive job for Station 5.
1.
Click on the Send-Receive Jobs icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
3.
Complete the fields listed below to configure the Receive job for
Station 5:
Job Name:
Start Bit:
Job Type:
Motorrec
WY7.3
Receive
Connection:
Motor
Status Word V:
5
Local Address #1:
Saving the
Configuration File
to Disk
Transferring the
Configuration to
the FMS CP Module
at Station 5
V101,2
You should save your file to disk before attempting to transfer the file to the
FMS CP module. To save the file to disk, follow these steps:
1.
Select the menu command File → Save As... or click on the Save
button:
2.
Select a directory to store the saved file.
3.
Enter a file name.
4.
Click on Save.
After saving your configuration file, download it to the FMS CP module at
Station 5 by following these steps:
1.
Disconnect the programming cable from the FMS CP module at
Station 1, and reconnect the cable to the RS-232 port on the FMS CP
module at Station 5.
2.
Select the menu command Transfer → Download to the CP5434, or
click on the Download button:
3.
Click on OK.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-21
Example of a Send-Receive Job (continued)
After you successfully load the configuration files to both programmable
logic controller stations, you must add RLL coding to the RLL programs of
both programmable logic controllers to activate the transfer of data. Refer to
Figure 6-16 for an example of RLL code to activate the Send request and to
Figure 6-17 for an example of RLL code to activate the Receive request.
Example RLL Code
for Send Job at
Station 1
The Relay Ladder Logic example in Figure 6-16 demonstrates a typical
scenario for enabling a Send request. This section assumes that you are
familiar with Series 505 programmable logic controller language. The WX
and WY locations used in this RLL example correspond to module I/O
addresses that have been configured in programmable logic controller
memory using the Configure I/O function in TISOFT.
The logic shown in Figure 6-16 performs as described in Table 6-1:
Table 6-1 Description of Send Logic
6-22
C98
Enables condition logic, defined by the application (Xn), which
must remain active until job completion.
MOVW1
Sets status word V300 to a positive value (1) prior to each
transaction. This positive value is used for job completion check in
CMP1.
BITP3/BITP4
Ensures that no pending jobs exist prior to starting a Send job.
(defined for Bit 1 of FMS CP module, located at I/O address WY5).
BITC3
Clears the FMS CP job defined for Bit 3 of the FMS CP module
located at WY5 after the Job Active bit WX1 is set.
BITS2
Sets the Start Bit defined for Bit 3 of the FMS CP module located
at WY5 to invoke a data transfer function.
CMP1
Tests the completion status of the data transfer by the same FMS
CP, placed in V300, against a zero constant stored at location V15.
When the Send job has completed, the value of status word V300
is zero—good transaction—or a non-zero value—bad transaction
(see Table B-1 and Table B-4). You must take appropriate action
in the USER ERROR CONTROL LOGIC ladder rung at this time.
If the job is to be executed only one time, you must take action to
disable Xn after the Status word changes value from its preset
condition.
C41/C43
The parallel net of C41 and C43 act together to start and hold
TMR2 on until either the FMS CP recognizes that the Job Start
bit WY5.3 has been set and responds by setting the Job Active bit
WX1.3 or else TMR2 time expires.
TMR2
BITC4
TMR2 and BITC4 are used to clear an unrecognized Job Start bit
WY5.3. Either a reset of the FMS CP or a power cycle of the
entire base may cause the programmable logic controller ladder to
set a WY Job Start bit prior to FMS CP recovery. When this
condition occurs, the FMS CP module does not execute the job
(see note on page 4-5).
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Xn
C43
C98
C101
C98
MOVW1
C41
A: 1
B:V300
N=1
BITP3
BITP4
Existing Job Active Check
A: WY5
N=3
C101
C41
BITC3
C41
C98
C27
BITS2
A: WY5
N=3
C30
C101
C41
C42
Communication Reset
A: WY5
N=3
C101
C30
Communication Interlock
Existing Job Active Check
A: WY5
WX1
A:
N=1
N=3
C98
C98
Enabling Rung (User Logic)
Beginning Communication Rung
C43
CMP1
Communication Complete
C28
LT:C26
GT:C27
C26
C28
A: V15
B:V300
C27
C35
User Error Control Logic
Enable TMR2 with BITS2 and hold with BITP4 until the
FMS CP sets WX Job Active Bit or TMR2 expires.
C41
C44
C43
TMR2 and BITC4 act as a WY Start Bit reset in cases where the
FMS CP powers up with WY Start Bit high (see note on page 4-5).
C44
TMR2
C29
BITC4
A: WY5
N=3
C29
C101
P= 30.0
END
Figure 6-16 Send Relay Ladder Logic for Station 1
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-23
Example of a Send-Receive Job (continued)
Example RLL Code
for Receive Job at
Station 5
The Relay Ladder Logic example in Figure 6-17 demonstrates a typical
scenario for enabling a Receive acknowledgement. This section assumes
that you are familiar with Series 505 programmable logic controller
language. The WX and WY locations used in this RLL example correspond
to module I/O addresses that have been configured in programmable logic
controller memory using the Configure I/O function.
The logic shown in Figure 6-17 performs as described in Table 6-2:
Table 6-2 Description of Receive Logic
6-24
C49
Enables condition logic, defined by the application (Xn), which
must remain active until job completion.
MOVW1
Sets status word V302 to a positive value (1) prior to each
transaction. This positive value is used for job completion check in
CMP1.
BITP1/BITP2
Ensures that no pending jobs exist prior to starting a Receive job
defined for Bit 3 of FMS CP module, located at I/O address WY7.
BITC1
Clears the job defined for Bit 3 of the FMS CP module located at
WY7 after the Job Active bit WX3 is set.
BITS1
Sets the Job Start Bit defined for Bit 3 of the FMS CP module
located at WY7 to invoke a data transfer function.
CMP1
Tests the completion status of the data transfer by the same FMS
CP module, placed in V302, against a zero constant stored at
location V25. When the Peer job has completed, the value of
status word V302 is zero—good transaction—or a non-zero
value—the corresponding SEND job has not executed or some
other error has occurred (see Table B-1 and Table B-4). You must
take appropriate action in the USER ERROR CONTROL LOGIC
ladder rung at this time. If the job is to be executed only one time,
you take must take action to disable Xn after the Status word
changes value from its preset condition.
C31/C33
The parallel net of C31 and C33 act together to start and hold
TMR1 on until either the FMS CP recognizes that the Job Start
bit WY7.3 has been set and responds by setting the Job Active bit
WX3.3 or else TMR1 time expires.
TMR1
BITC2
TMR1 and BITC2 are used to clear an unrecognized Job Start bit
WY7.3. Either a reset of the CP or a power cycle of the entire
base may cause the programmable logic controller ladder to set a
WY Job Start bit prior to FMS CP recovery. When this condition
occurs, the FMS CP module does not execute the job (see the note
on page 4-5).
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Xn
C33
C49
C50
C49
C31
BITP1
MOVW1
A: 1
B:V302
N=3
C31
Existing Job Active Check
BITC1
C31
C31
C49
C37
C32
Communication Reset
A: WY7
N=3
C50
C40
C50
BITP2
A: WY7
N=3
C50
Communication Interlock
Existing Job Active Check
A: WX3
N=3
C49
C49
Enabling Rung (User Logic)
BITS1
C40
C33
Beginning Communication Rung
A: WY7
N=3
CMP1
Communication Complete
C38
LT:C36
GT:C37
C36
C38
A: V25
B:V302
C37
User Error Control Logic
Enable TMR1 with BITS1 and hold with BITP2 until the
FMS CP sets WX Job Active Bit or TRM1 expires.
C31
C45
C34
C33
TMR1 and BITC2 act as a WY Start Bit reset in cases where the
FMS CP powers up with WY Start Bit high (see note on page 4-5).
C34
TMR1
C46
BITC2
A: WY7
N=3
C46
C50
P= 30.0
END
Figure 6-17 Receive Relay Ladder Logic for Station 5
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-25
Example of a Send-Receive Job (continued)
Successful Timing
Example
Figure 6-18 shows the sequence of events for a successful FDL transaction.
SEND
WY5.3
t0
t8
t2
WX1.3
t1
t3
RECEIVE
WY7.3
t6
t4
WX3.3
t5
t7
Figure 6-18 Successful Timing Example
The list below explains the sequence of events.
6-26
t0
Send Job RLL requests that data transfer be invoked.
t1
Send Job Active bit is set by the FMS CP. Data transfer begins.
t2
Send Job Start Bit is reset to inactive by Send job RLL in response to
Job Active bit going high.
t3
Send job completes the data transfer. Send job resets Job Active bit.
Send job is complete.
t4
Receive job RLL requests that received data be processed and stored.
t5
Receive Job Active bit is set by the FMS CP module. FMS CP begins
storage of received data.
t6
Receive Job Start Bit is reset to inactive by Receive job RLL in response
to Job Active bit going high.
t7
Receive job has stored received data in programmable logic controller
memory. Receive job resets Job Active bit. Receive job is complete and
stores job status of 0 (successful transaction).
t8
Send job re-enables the data transfer for another data transfer if
required.
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Unsuccessful
Timing Example
Figure 6-19 shows the sequence of events for an unsuccessful FDL
transaction.
SEND
WY5.3
t0
t1
WX1.3
a
RECEIVE
WY7.3
t2
t4
WX3.3
t3
t5
Figure 6-19 Unsuccessful Timing Example
The list below explains the sequence of events.
t0
Send job RLL requests that a data transfer be invoked.
t1
Programmable logic controller sets WY5.3 low before seeing WX1.3 go
high. (RLL code prematurely resets WY5.3 to zero.)
a
WX1.3 never goes high; that is, the job never starts and no data is sent.
t2
Receive job RLL requests that received data be processed and stored.
t3
Receive Job Active bit is set active by the FMS CP. However, no data
was sent.
t4
Receive job Start Bit is reset to inactive by Receive job RLL in response
to FMS CP Job Active bit.
t5
Receive job has completed but no data was received. Receive job resets
Job Active bit and stores job status E0E0 instead of 0.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-27
6.4
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service
Configuration Tasks
for a Peerlink II
Service
Figure 6-20 shows Transmit and Receive services between two stations.
Using the COM5434 Configurator, configure these Peerlink II Services by
completing the following tasks:
Create and name the configuration file for Station 1.
Define the Module Local Configuration for Station 1.
Set the peer transmit interval and peer priority factor.
Configure a Transmit service.
Configure a Receive service.
Save and download the configuration file to the FMS CP module at
Station 1.
Repeat the steps above for Station 5.
Station 5
Data to memory
Transmit (blue box count)
Receive (red box count)
Data from memory
CPU
FMS CP
Station 1
Data to memory
Data to memory
Data from memory
Station 5
Transmit (red box count)
Receive (blue box count)
CPU
FMS CP
Data from memory
CPU
FMS CP
Red Box PLC
Station 1
CPU
FMS CP
Blue Box PLC
Data from memory
Data to memory
Figure 6-20 Peerlink Data Block Transfer Services
These tasks are described in detail on the following pages.
6-28
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Creating the
Configuration File
for Station 1
The first step in the process is to create the configuration file for Station 1.
1.
Select the menu command File → New to create an empty
configuration file.
2.
Enter a description for this file in the Description field, as shown below
(and in Figure 6-21):
Description:
Blue Box CPU
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Blue Box CPU
Module Local Configuration
Description: Blue Box CPU
File Name: UNTITLED
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Directory:
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Modified?: NO
FDL
Enter description
here.
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
Last Saved File:
Last Saved Directory:
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Edit
Current configuration file specification
Figure 6-21 Creating a Configuration File Example
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-29
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service (continued)
Setting the Module
Local
Configuration for
Station 1
Next, you must define the Module Local Configuration of the FMS CP
module for Station 1.
1.
Click on the Module Local Configuration icon.
2.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-22) to define
the Module Local Configuration:
Local Station Address:
1
Highest Station Address:
Bus Parameter Profile:
Baud Rate:
15
FMS-DP Universal
1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token):
# of Slaves (no token):
6
0
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Blue Box CPU
Click here.
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
Enter parameters
here.
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local Station Address: 1
Highest Station Address: 15
Bus Parameter Profile: FMS-DP Universal
Baud Rate: 1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token): 6
# of Slaves (no token): 0
Slot Time (Tslot): 3000
Max. Sta. Delay (Max_Tsdr): 980
Min. Sta. Delay (Min_Tsdr): 150
Setup Time (Tset): 240
Quiet Time (Tqui): 0
Gap Factor: 50
Retry Limit: 1
Token Rotation (Ttr): 45000
This module’s FMS PROFIBUS communication parameters
Edit
Figure 6-22 Module Local Configuration Example
6-30
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuring the
Peerlink II Transmit
Service
Once you have defined the Module Local Configuration, you can configure
the peer transmit interval and priority factor, (as shown in Figure 6-23).
1.
Click on the Peerlink II Services icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Enter the parameters listed below:
Peer Transmit Interval:
Peer Priority Factor:
10
8
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Blue Box CPU
Click here.
Maximum Peer Blocks: 32
Module Local Configuration
Peer Transmit Blocks Available: 1
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Peer Receive Blocks Available: 31
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Peer Transmit Interval: 10
Peer Priority Factor: 8
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Enter parameters
here. (These are
the default values.)
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Edit
Figure 6-23 Peerlink Service Configuration Example
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-31
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service (continued)
3.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
4.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-24) to
configure the Peerlink II Transmit service:
Peer Job Name:
Descriptor ID:
Blue Box Count
1
Peer Job Type:
Transmit
Local Address:
V200, 50
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Blue Box CPU
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
P-P
Click the
New Item
button.
FMS
FDL
Blue Box Count
Peer Block Name: Blue Box Count
Descriptor ID: 1
Peer Block Type: Transmit
Local Address: V200, 50
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Enter parameters
here.
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Edit
Figure 6-24 Peerlink II Services Example
6-32
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuring the
Peerlink II Receive
Service
Continue by configuring the parameters for a Receive service.
1.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
2.
Complete the fields listed below to configure the Receive service:
Peer Job Name:
Descriptor ID:
Saving the
Configuration File
to Disk
Transferring the
Configuration to
the FMS CP Module
at Station 1
Red Box Count
2
Peer Job Type:
Receive
Local Address:
V300, 50
Next, save your file to disk before attempting to transfer the file to the
FMS CP module. To save the file to disk, follow these steps:
1.
Select the menu command File → Save As... or click on the Save
button:
2.
Select a directory to store the saved file.
3.
Enter a file name.
4.
Click on Save.
After saving your configuration file, download it to the FMS CP module at
Station 1 by following these steps:
1.
Select the menu command Transfer → Download to the CP5434, or
click on the Download button:
2.
Click on OK.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-33
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service (continued)
Creating the
Configuration File
for Station 5
The second step in the process is to create the configuration file for
Station 5.
1.
Select the menu command File → New to create an empty
configuration file.
2.
Enter a description for this file in the Description field, as shown below
(and in Figure 6-25):
Description:
Red Box CPU
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Red Box CPU
Module Local Configuration
Description: Red Box CPU
File Name: UNTITLED
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Directory:
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Modified?: NO
FDL
Enter description
here.
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
Last Saved File:
Last Saved Directory:
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Edit
Current configuration file specification
Figure 6-25 Creating a Configuration File for Station 5 Example
6-34
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Setting the Module
Local
Configuration for
Station 5
Next, you must define the Module Local Configuration of the FMS CP
module for Station 5.
1.
Click on the Module Local Configuration icon.
2.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-26) to define
the Module Local Configuration:
Local Station Address:
5
Highest Station Address:
Bus Parameter Profile:
Baud Rate:
15
FMS-DP Universal
1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token):
# of Slaves (no token):
6
0
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Red Box CPU
Click here.
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Communication Jobs
FMS
Enter parameters
here.
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Local Station Address: 1
Highest Station Address: 15
Bus Parameter Profile: FMS-DP Universal
Baud Rate: 1.5 MBaud
# of Masters (holds token): 6
# of Slaves (no token): 0
Slot Time (Tslot): 3000
Max. Sta. Delay (Max_Tsdr): 980
Min. Sta. Delay (Min_Tsdr): 150
Setup Time (Tset): 240
Quiet Time (Tqui): 0
Gap Factor: 50
Retry Limit: 1
Token Rotation (Ttr): 45000
Edit
This module’s FMS PROFIBUS communication parameters
Figure 6-26 Module Local Configuration Example
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-35
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service (continued)
Configuring the
Peerlink II Transmit
Service
Once you have defined the Module Local Configuration, you can configure
the peer transmit interval and priority factor, (as shown in Figure 6-27).
1.
Click on the Peerlink II Services icon of the configuration tree.
2.
Enter the parameters listed below:
Peer Transmit Interval:
Peer Priority Factor:
10
8
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Red Box CPU
Click here.
Maximum Peer Blocks: 32
Module Local Configuration
Peer Transmit Blocks Available: 1
P–P
Peerlink II Services
Peer Receive Blocks Available: 31
FMS
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
FDL
Peer Transmit Interval: 10
Peer Priority Factor: 8
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Enter parameters
here. (These are
the default values.)
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Edit
Figure 6-27 Peerlink Service Configuration Example
6-36
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
3.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
4.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-28) to
configure the Peerlink II Transmit service:
Peer Job Name:
Descriptor ID:
Red Box Count
2
Peer Job Type:
Transmit
Local Address:
V200, 50
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Red Box CPU
Module Local Configuration
Peerlink II Services
P–P
P-P
Click the
New Item
button.
FMS
FDL
Red Box Count
Peer Block Name: Red Box Count
Descriptor ID: 2
Peer Block Type: Transmit
Local Address: V200, 50
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Enter parameters
here.
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Edit
Figure 6-28 Peerlink II Transmit Service Example
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-37
Example of a Peerlink II Transmit and Receive Service (continued)
Configuring the
Peerlink II Receive
Service
Continue by configuring the parameters for a Receive service.
1.
Click on the New Item button on the toolbar.
2.
Complete the fields listed below (and shown in Figure 6-29) to
configure the Receive service:
Peer Job Name:
Descriptor ID:
Blue Box Count
1
Peer Job Type:
Receive
Local Address:
V300, 50
Untitled – COM5434
Options Diagnostics
Help
✂
File Edit Transfer
Red Box CPU
Peer Block Name: Blue Box Count
Module Local Configuration
P–P
Peerlink II Services
P-P
Click the
New Item
button.
P-P
FMS
FDL
Local Address: V300, 50
Blue Box Count
Red Box Count
Descriptor ID: 1
Peer Block Type: Receive
Enter parameters
here.
FMS Connections
FDL Connections
Communication Jobs
FMS
S–R
FMS Jobs
Send-Receive Jobs
FMS Data Types
FMS Variables
DTs
Second service is
displayed alphabetically
at the top of the list.
Configured cyclic data blocks sent/received to/from other 505-CP5434-FMS modules
Edit
Figure 6-29 Peerlink II Services Example
6-38
Configuration Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Saving the
Configuration File
to Disk
Next, save your file to disk before attempting to transfer the file to the
FMS CP module. To save the file to disk, follow these steps:
1.
Select the menu command File → Save As... or click on the Save
button:
2.
Select a directory to store the saved file.
3.
Enter a file name, as shown in Figure 6-30.
4.
Click on Save.
Save As
Save in:
Configsw
Name
Size Type
Modified
Blue_CPU.fms
41KB COM5434 Configuration File
9/15/97 11:28 AM
File_A.fms
41KB COM5434 Configuration File
10/31/97 11:59 PM
File_AB.fms
41KB COM5434 Configuration File
File_B.fms
41KB COM5434 Configuration File
11/3/97 9:59Click
AM here for
fileAM
details.
11/3/97 10:05
File_BA.fms
COM5434 Configuration File
Enter name here.
File name:
Red_CPU.fms
Save as type:
COM5434 Configuration Files (*.fms)
11/4/97 10:15 AM
Save
Cancel
Figure 6-30 Save As Dialog
Transferring the
Configuration to
the FMS CP Module
at Station 1
After saving your configuration file, download it to the FMS CP module at
Station 1 by following these steps:
1.
Select the menu command Transfer → Download to the CP5434, or
click on the Download button:
2.
Click on OK.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuration Examples
6-39
Chapter 7
Diagnostics
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
CP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
Viewing the Status of the FMS CP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Status Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling CP Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-2
Active Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
Viewing the List of Active Stations on the Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
PROFIBUS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Viewing the PROFIBUS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7-4
FMS Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
Viewing the Status of FMS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
7-5
FDL Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Viewing the Status of FDL Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
Viewing the Status of FMS and Send-Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7-7
Peer Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Viewing the Status of Peer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Diagnostics
7-1
7.1
CP Status
Viewing the Status
of the FMS CP
Module
The Read CP Status dialog provides useful information on the operating
status of the module. To view this information, select the menu command
Diagnostics → CP Status. The Read CP Status dialog appears, as shown
in Figure 7-1.
Read CP Status
CP Type: 505-CP5434-FMS
Firmware Version: 1.0
Release Date: 12-97
Current Mode: RUN - Configuration Good
In-Profibus Ring?: Yes
RAM Used: 476352
RAM Available: 366736 Bytes (43%)
0
1
2
3
4
5
Continuous Update Rate (sec):
OK
Update
Reset CP
Cont. Update
Start CP
Help
Stop CP
Figure 7-1 Read CP Status Dialog Box
Setting the Status
Update Rate
The default diagnostic mode is a single (current) reading of the operating
status of the module. You can set the mode to provide a continuous update
of the operating status by clicking on the “Cont. Update” button. Then drag
the slider control to adjust the update rate within a range of 0 to 5 seconds.
(When you select continuous update, the button changes to “Stop Update,”
which you can click to return to the current status in noncontinuous mode.)
Controlling CP
Operation Modes
The CP Status dialog also provides buttons that allow you to use the
software to put the FMS CP module in STOP mode or RUN mode, or to
initiate a module reset (equivalent to the Reset button in the module
faceplate).
7-2
Diagnostics
•
Click on the “Stop CP” button to switch the module to STOP mode.
•
Click on the “Start CP” button to switch the module to RUN mode.
•
Click on the “Reset CP” button to initiate a module reset.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
7.2
Active Stations
Viewing the List of
Active Stations on
the Bus
The List of Active Stations dialog lists all stations on the bus and the
current status of each. To view this information, select the menu command
Diagnostics → Active Stations. The List of Active Stations dialog
appears, as shown in Figure 7-2.
List of Active Stations
The list contains all stations present on the bus, and the current status of each
station.
Station#
2
4
Current Status
Active Station in ring
Active Station in ring
0
1
2
3
4
5
Continuous Update Rate (sec):
OK
Update
Cont. Update
Help
Figure 7-2 List of Active Stations Dialog Box
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Diagnostics
7-3
7.3
PROFIBUS Statistics
Viewing the
PROFIBUS Statistics
The PROFIBUS Statistics dialog provides statistical information about the
status of the PROFIBUS communications. To view this information, select
the menu command Diagnostics → PROFIBUS Statistics. The
PROFIBUS dialog appears, as shown in Figure 7-3.
PROFIBUS Statistics
Bus Statistics:
Bus Timeouts: 0
Electrical Faults: 0
Bus Collisions: 0
HSA Exceeded: 0
Reset Counts
Problem creating LAS: 0
Receive Frame Errors:
Interface Statistics LAYER 2:
Incorrect Responses: 0
Requests: 271437
SPC Overflows: 0
Confirmed Requests: 271437
Indications: 183281
0
1
2
3
4
5
Continuous Update Rate (sec):
OK
Update
Cont. Update
Help
Figure 7-3 PROFIBUS Statistics Dialog Box
PROFIBUS Errors
7-4
Diagnostics
Some of the possible PROFIBUS errors are the following:
•
The bus statistic “HSA Exceeded” refers to Highest Station Address.
•
The bus statistic “Problem creating LAS” refers to List of Active
Stations.
•
“SPC Overflows” indicates how many times the memory buffer in the
Siemens PROFIBUS Controller chip has been exceeded.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
7.4
FMS Connection Status
Viewing the Status
of FMS
Connections
The List of FMS Connections dialog lists the existing configured FMS
connections and the current status of each. To view this information, select
the menu command Diagnostics → FMS Connection Status. The List of
Configured FMS Connections dialog appears, as shown in Figure 7-4.
List of Configured FMS Connections - Local Station = 1
The list contains all configured FMS connections and their current status.
LSAP (Loc/Rem) Addr Status
Name
fms_connection_1
fms_connection_2
fms_connection_3
3/5
5/7
4/8
2
4
5
Establishing connection
Establishing connection
Ready for data transfer
Connection Type: MMAC
Sends (pos): 0
Receives (pos): 0
Sends (neg): 0
Receives (neg): 0
0
1
2
3
4
5
Continuous Update Rate (sec):
OK
Update
Cont. Update
Reset Counts
Help
Figure 7-4 List of Configured FMS Connections Dialog Box
FMS Connection
Types
According to which row in the list is highlighted, the “Connection Type” field
below the list displays one of the following connection types:
MMAC – Master-master on acyclic connection
MSAC – Master-slave on acyclic connection
MSAC_SI – Master-slave on acyclic connection with slave initiative
MSCY – Master-slave on cyclic connection
For more information on these connection types, see Section A.5.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Diagnostics
7-5
7.5
FDL Connection Status
Viewing the Status
of FDL Connections
The List of FDL Connections dialog lists the existing configured FDL
connections and the current status of each. To view this information, select
the menu command Diagnostics → FDL Connection Status. The List of
Configured FDL Connections dialog appears, as shown in Figure 7-5.
List of Configured FDL Connections - Local Station = 1
The list contains all configured FDL connections and their current status.
LSAP (Loc/Rem) Addr Receive Status
Name
fdl_connection_1
fdl_connection_2
fdl_connection_3
3/5
5/7
4/8
2
4
5
Sends (pos): 0
Sends (neg): 0
Receives: 0
Send Status
Waiting for user data
Waiting for user data
Waiting for user data
0
1
2
Ready for data transfer
Ready for data transfer
Ready for data transfer
3
4
5
Continuous Update Rate (sec):
OK
Update
Cont. Update
Reset Counts
Help
Figure 7-5 List of Configured FDL Connections Dialog Box
7-6
Diagnostics
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
7.6
Job Status
Viewing the Status
of FMS and
Send-Receive Jobs
The List of FMS/Send-Receive Jobs dialog lists the existing FMS jobs and
Send-Receive jobs and the status of each. To view this information, select
the menu command Diagnostics → Job Status. The List of Configured
FMS/Send-Receive Jobs dialog appears, as shown in Figure 7-6.
List of Configured FMS/Send-Receive Jobs
The list contains all FMS and Send-Receive Jobs and their last reported status.
Job Name
Start Bit
State
Status
fms_job_1
sr_job_1
sr_job_2
WY5.1
WY5.2
WY5.3
Wait start bit activation
Wait start bit activation
Wait start bit activation
OK
OK
OK
Job Type: FMS Read
0
1
2
3
4
5
Continuous Update Rate (sec):
OK
Update
Cont. Update
Reset Counts
Help
Figure 7-6 List of Configured FMS/Send-Receive Jobs Dialog Box
Job Types
According to which row in the list is highlighted, the “Job Type” field below
the list displays one of the following job types: Read, Write, Information
Report, Status, or Identify for FMS jobs; Send or Receive.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Diagnostics
7-7
7.7
Peer Block Status
Viewing the Status
of Peer Blocks
The List of Configured Peer Blocks dialog lists the existing configured Peer
Blocks and the current status of each. To view this information, select the
menu command Diagnostics → Peer Block Status. The List of
Configured Peer Blocks dialog appears, as shown in Figure 7-7.
List of Configured Peer Blocks
The list contains all configured Peer Blocks and their current status.
Name
peer_block_1
peer_block_2
peer_block_3
Descriptor
Tx Interval
Receives
1
5
25
10
–
–
–
62448
5
Status
OK
OK
OK
Block Type: Transmit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Continuous Update Rate (sec):
OK
Update
Cont. Update
Reset Counts
Help
Figure 7-7 List of Configured Peer Block Dialog Box
NOTE: The “Tx Interval” value shown is the actual peer transmit interval.
This may differ from the configured transmit interval if the FMS CP module
is too heavily loaded to keep up with the configured interval.
7-8
Diagnostics
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Appendix A
Reference Data
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
Data Element List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
SIMATIC 505 Data Types and S7 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Data Access between SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC 505 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
SIMATIC 505 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMATIC S7 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using S7 Addressing to Specify 505 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-7
Mapping of FMS Variables onto 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Simple Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of FMS Status Response in 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping of FMS Identify Response in 505 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.5
FMS Connection Types and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
FMS Connection Types and Possible Job Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Configuring Read/Write Access to Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.6
Local LSAP Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-1
A.1
Data Element List
SIMATIC 505
Data Types and
S7 Addressing
Table A-1 shows the allowed data types (elements) for local or remote
SIMATIC 505 PLCs. It also shows the SIMATIC S7 data type to use when
accessing a Series 505 PLC from an S7 PLC.
Table A-1 Data Element List
Name
PLC
TT
Access
PLC
S7 Area
S7 Subarea
Representation
(DB=84H)
Hex (Dec)
Variable Memory
V
01
read/write
integer
DB
100–2FF
(256–767)
Constant
K
02
r/w
integer
DB
300–4FF
(768–1279)
Discrete Input
X
03
r/w
Boolean
DB
03 (3)
Discrete Output
Y
04
r/w
Boolean
DB
04 (4)
Control Register
C
05
r/w
Boolean
DB
05 (5)
Discrete Input Packed
XP
06
r/w
packed
I (81H)
not used
Discrete Output Packed
YP
07
r/w
packed
Q (82H)
not used
Control Register Packed
CP
08
r/w
packed
M (83H)
not used
Word Input
WX
09
r/w
integer
DB
09 (9)
Word Output
WY
0A
r/w
integer
DB
0A (10)
Timer/Counter Preset
TCP
0E
r/w
integer
DB
0E (14)
Timer/Counter Current
TCC
0F
r/w
integer
DB
0F (15)
Drum Step Preset
DSP
10
r/w
integer
DB
10 (16)
Drum Step Current
DSC
11
r/w
integer
DB
11 (17)
Data Element Description
Drum Count Preset
Notes
DCP
12
r/w
integer
DB
12 (18)
System Status Words
1
STW
1A
r/w
16-bit
DB
1A (26)
Drum Current Count
DCC
1B
read
32-bit
DB
1B (27)
LS
1E
read
16-bit
DB
1E (30)
Loop Mode
LM
1F
r/w
16-bit
DB
1F (31)
Loop Gain
LKC
20
r/w
real
DB
20 (32)
Loop Reset time (minutes)
LTI
21
r/w
real
DB
21 (33)
Loop Rate time (minutes)
LTD
22
r/w
real
DB
22 (34)
Loop High Alarm Limit
LHA
23
r/w
real
DB
23 (35)
Loop Low Alarm Limit
LLA
24
r/w
real
DB
24 (36)
Loop Process Variable
LPV
25
r/w
real
DB
25 (37)
Loop PV High Limit
LPVH
26
r/w
real
DB
26 (38)
Loop PV Low Limit
LPVL
27
r/w
real
DB
27 (39)
Loop Orange Deviation Alarm Limit
LODA
28
r/w
real
DB
28 (40)
Loop Yellow Deviation Alarm Limit
LYDA
29
r/w
real
DB
29 (41)
Loop Sample rate (seconds)
LTS
2A
r/w
real
DB
2A (42)
Loop Setpoint
LSP
2B
r/w
real
DB
2B (43)
LMN
2C
r/w
real
DB
2C (44)
LVF
2D
r/w
16-bit
DB
2D (45)
Loop Status
Loop Output (percent)
Loop V-flags
A-2
Reference Data
2
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Table A-1 Data Element List (continued)
Data Element Description
Notes
Loop C-flags
Loop Ramp/Soak Status Flags
2
Loop Error
Loop Bias
Name
PLC
TT
Access
PLC
S7 Area
S7 Subarea
Representation
(DB=84H)
Hex (Dec)
LCF
2E
r/w
32-bit
DB
2E (46)
LRSF
2F
r/w
16-bit
DB
2F (47)
LERR
30
read
real
DB
30 (48)
LMX
31
r/w
real
DB
31 (49)
LHHA
32
r/w
real
DB
32 (50)
Loop Low-Low Alarm Limit
LLLA
33
r/w
real
DB
33 (51)
Loop Rate-of-Change Alarm Limit
LRCA
34
r/w
real
DB
34 (52)
Loop Setpoint High Limit
LSPH
35
r/w
real
DB
35 (53)
Loop Setpoint Low Limit
LSPL
36
r/w
real
DB
36 (54)
Loop Alarm Deadband
LADB
37
r/w
real
DB
37 (55)
Loop Raw High Alarm Limit
LHAR
38
r/w
integer
DB
38 (56)
Loop Raw Low Alarm Limit
LLAR
39
r/w
integer
DB
39 (57)
Loop High-High Alarm Limit
Loop Raw Process Variable
LPVR
3A
r/w
integer
DB
3A (58)
Loop Raw Orange Deviation Alarm Limit
LODAR
3B
r/w
integer
DB
3B (59)
Loop Raw Yellow Deviation Alarm Limit
LYDAR
3C
r/w
integer
DB
3C (60)
Loop Raw Output
LMNR
3D
r/w
integer
DB
3D (61)
Loop Raw Setpoint
LSPR
3E
r/w
integer
DB
3E (62)
Loop Raw Error
LERRR
3F
read
integer
DB
3F (63)
Loop Raw High/High Alarm Limit
LHHAR
40
r/w
integer
DB
40 (64)
Loop Raw Low/Low Alarm Limit
LLLAR
41
r/w
integer
DB
41 (65)
Loop Raw Alarm Deadband
LADBR
42
r/w
integer
DB
42 (66)
Loop Raw Bias
LMXR
48
r/w
integer
DB
48 (72)
Loop Raw Setpoint Low Limit
LSPLR
49
r/w
integer
DB
49 (73)
Loop Raw Setpoint High Limit
LSPHR
4A
r/w
integer
DB
4A (74)
Loop Most-significant word loop C-flags
LCFH
4B
r/w
integer
DB
4B (75)
Loop Least-significant word loop C-flags
LCFL
4C
r/w
integer
DB
4C (76)
Loop Derivative Gain Limiting Coefficient
LKD
4D
r/w
real
DB
4D (77)
Loop Ramp/Soak Step Number
LRSN
4E
r/w
integer
DB
4E (78)
Loop Alarm Acknowledge Flags
LACK
4F
r/w
integer
DB
4F (79)
High Alarm Limit
3
AHA
50
r/w
real
DB
50 (80)
Low Alarm Limit
3
ALA
51
r/w
real
DB
51 (81)
Process Variable
3
APV
52
r/w
real
DB
52 (82)
PV High Limit
3
APVH
53
r/w
real
DB
53 (83)
PV Low Limit
3
APVL
54
r/w
real
DB
54 (84)
Orange Deviation Alarm Limit
3
AODA
55
r/w
real
DB
55 (85)
Yellow Deviation Alarm Limit
3
AYDA
56
r/w
real
DB
56 (86)
Sample rate in seconds
3
ATS
57
r/w
real
DB
57 (87)
Alarm Setpoint
3
ASP
58
r/w
real
DB
58 (88)
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-3
Data Element List (continued)
Table A-1 Data Element List (continued)
Notes
Name
PLC
TT
Access
PLC
S7 Area
S7 Subarea
Representation
(DB=84H)
Hex (Dec)
Alarm V-flags
2, 3
AVF
59
r/w
16-bit
DB
59 (89)
Alarm C-flags
3
ACF
Alarm Error
3
AERR
5A
r/w
32-bit
DB
5A (90)
5B
read
real
DB
5B (91)
High-High Alarm Limit
3
Low-Low Alarm Limit
3
AHHA
5C
r/w
real
DB
5C (92)
ALLA
5D
r/w
real
DB
5D (93)
Rate-of-change Alarm Limit
Setpoint High Limit
3
ARCA
5E
r/w
real
DB
5E (94)
3
ASPH
5F
r/w
real
DB
5F (95)
Setpoint Low Limit
Alarm Deadband
3
ASPL
60
r/w
real
DB
60 (96)
3
AADB
61
r/w
real
DB
61 (97)
Raw High Alarm Limit
3
AHAR
62
r/w
integer
DB
62 (98)
Raw Low Alarm Limit
3
ALAR
63
r/w
integer
DB
63 (99)
Raw Process Variable
3
APVR
64
r/w
integer
DB
64 (100)
Raw Orange Deviation Alarm Limit
3
AODAR
65
r/w
integer
DB
65 (101)
Raw Yellow Deviation Alarm Limit
3
AYDAR
66
r/w
integer
DB
66 (102)
Alarm Raw Setpoint
3
ASPR
67
r/w
integer
DB
67 (103)
Raw Alarm Deadband
3
AADBR
68
r/w
integer
DB
68 (104)
Alarm Raw Error
3
AERRR
69
read
integer
DB
69 (105)
Raw High-High Alarm Limit
3
AHHAR
6A
r/w
integer
DB
6A (106)
Raw Low-Low Alarm Limit
3
ALLAR
6B
r/w
integer
DB
6B (107)
Raw Setpoint Low Limit
3
ASPLR
6F
r/w
integer
DB
6F (111)
Raw Setpoint High Limit
3
ASPHR
70
r/w
integer
DB
70 (112)
Most-significant word Alarm C-flags
3
ACFH
71
r/w
integer
DB
71 (113)
Least-significant word Alarm C-flags
3
ACFL
72
r/w
integer
DB
72 (114)
Alarm Acknowledge Flags
3
AACK
73
r/w
integer
DB
73 (115)
VME (575 only) A24 Space
4
VMM
D3
r/w
integer
DB
500–6FF
(1280–1791)
VME (575 only) A16 Space
4
VMS
D4
r/w
integer
DB
D4 (212)
GZ (Application Z global Variables)
5
GZ
D5
r/w
integer
DB
D5 (213)
GY (Application Y global Variables)
5
GY
D6
r/w
integer
DB
D6 (214)
GX (Application X global Variables)
5
GZ
D7
r/w
integer
DB
D7 (215)
GW (Application W global Variables)
5
GW
D8
r/w
integer
DB
D8 (216)
GV (Application V global Variables)
5
GV
D9
r/w
integer
DB
D9 (217)
GU (Application U global Variables)
5
GU
DA
r/w
integer
DB
DA (218)
GT (Application T global Variables)
5
GT
DB
r/w
integer
DB
DB (219)
GS (Application S global Variables)
5
GS
DC
r/w
integer
DB
DC (220)
GR (Application R global Variables)
5
GR
DD
r/w
integer
DB
DD (221)
GQ (Application Q global Variables)
5
GQ
DE
r/w
integer
DB
DE (222)
GP (Application P global Variables)
5
GP
DF
r/w
integer
DB
DF (223)
Data Element Description
A-4
Reference Data
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Table A-1 Data Element List (continued)
Notes
Name
PLC
TT
Access
PLC
S7 Area
S7 Subarea
Representation
(DB=84H)
Hex (Dec)
GO (Application O global Variables)
5
GO
E0
r/w
integer
DB
E0 (224)
GN (Application N global Variables)
5
GN
GM (Application M global Variables)
5
GM
E1
r/w
integer
DB
E1 (225)
E2
r/w
integer
DB
E2 (226)
GL (Application L global Variables)
5
GK (Application K global Variables)
5
GL
E3
r/w
integer
DB
E3 (227)
GK
E4
r/w
integer
DB
E4 (228)
GJ (Application J global Variables)
5
GI (Application I global Variables)
5
GJ
E5
r/w
integer
DB
E5 (229)
GI
E6
r/w
integer
DB
E6 (230)
GH (Application H global Variables)
GG (Application G global Variables)
5
GH
E7
r/w
integer
DB
E7 (231)
5
GG
E8
r/w
integer
DB
E8 (232)
GF (Application F global Variables)
5
GF
E9
r/w
integer
DB
E9 (233)
GE (Application E global Variables)
5
GE
EA
r/w
integer
DB
EA (234)
GD (Application D global Variables)
5
GD
EB
r/w
integer
DB
EB (235)
GC (Application C global Variables)
5
GC
EC
r/w
integer
DB
EC (236)
GB (Application B global Variables)
5
GB
ED
r/w
integer
DB
ED (237)
GA (Application A global Variables)
5
GA
EE
r/w
integer
DB
EE (238)
G (Local Application Global Variables)
6
G
EF
r/w
integer
DB
EF (239)
Data Element Description
Note 1. The DCP address is a three-byte address containing a drum number in the
most significant 20 bits and a step number in the least significant 4 bits.
Note 2. These flags have a “control” part and a “status” part. When written, only
the control part is written. When read, the status part is returned with the control
part set to zero.
Note 3. This data element is an Analog Alarm type.
Note 4. VMS corresponds to VME address modifier 29 (short non-privileged access).
VMM corresponds to VME address modifier 39 (standard non-privileged data
access.) The access size is always 16 bits. The offset field contains the relative word
of the specified address space.
Note 5. Each PLC in a 575 system may contain one or more application process.
These applications are identified by a single letter ranging from Application A
through Application Z. Associated with each application is a G Memory partition.
Access to the G memory partitions (in the 575 PLC) associated with a PLC
application is provided through plcTT D5 through EE (hex). Addressing (plcTT
offset) of these partitions is 24-bit zero relative.
Note 6. The G memory partitions (in the 575 PLC) are global memories accessible
by the local PLC as well as by other bus masters. Access to the G memory partition
associated with the local PLC is provided through plcTT EF (hex). The addressing of
this partition is 24-bit zero relative; (that is, the first element of G memory is G1,
which has an offset of 0).
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-5
A.2
Data Access between SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC 505 Systems
SIMATIC 505
Addressing
Variables in the SIMATIC 505 system are addressed sequentially starting
from 1 regardless of the data size, and the quantity of data is measured in
multiples of the variable size. For example, V1, 1 represents 16 bits of data
and LSP1, 1 represents 32 bits of data.
SIMATIC S7
Addressing
In the SIMATIC S7 system, variables are numbered from 0 and use
“byte.bit” addressing, and the quantity of data is measured in multiples of a
specified data type. For example, DB1 DBX0.0 WORD 1 represents 16 bits
of data and DB1 DBX0.0 DWORD 1 represents 32 bits of data.
Special
Considerations
Packed bits (XP, YP, CP) can only be accessed in multiples of 8 bits using S7
addresses. Use the S7 data type BYTE to access packed bits.
Each unpacked bit (X, Y, C) in the SIMATIC 505 is represented by eight
bits, which correspond to the S7 BOOL data type. However, S7 addressing
restricts BOOL data to single items. To access multiple unpacked bits, use
the BYTE data type.
Addressing
Examples
Table A-2 shows examples of the equivalent addressing formats between a
SIMATIC 505 programmable controller system and a SIMATIC S7 system.
These examples show how to use S7 protocol read and write requests to
access data in the SIMATIC 505 system.
Table A-2 Equivalent Address Formats for SIMATIC 505 and S7 Systems
505 Addressing Format
S7 Addressing Format
V1, 1
V2, 1
V3, 1
V4, 1
V1, 2
DB256 DBX0.0 WORD 1
DB256 DBX2.0 WORD 1
DB256 DBX4.0 WORD 1
DB256 DBX6.0 WORD 1
DB256 DBX0.0 WORD 2
V32768, 1
V32769, 1
V32770, 1
DB256 DBX65534.0 WORD 1
DB257 DBX0.0 WORD 1
DB257 DBX2.0 WORD 1
X1, 1
Y2, 1
DB3 DBX0.0 BOOL 1
DB4 DBX1.0 BOOL 1
XP1, 8
YP1, 8
CP1, 8
I 0.0 BYTE 1*
Q 0.0 BYTE 1*
M 0.0 BYTE 1
WX1, 1
TCC1, 1
LSP1, 1
LSP2, 1
DB9 DBX0.0 WORD 1
DB15 DBX0.0 WORD 1
DB43 DBX0.0 DWORD 1
DB43 DBX4.0 DWORD 1
DCP6 S4, 2
DB18 DBX10.3 WORD 2
*I 0.0 and Q 0.0 are the mnemonics used in the International Mnemonic set. The equivalent
mnemonics in the SIMATIC set are E 0.0 and A 0.0, respectively.
A-6
Reference Data
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Using
S7 Addressing
to Specify
505 Variables
To derive the SIMATIC S7 address for a SIMATIC 505 variable, use the
following steps:
1.
Subtract 1 from the 505 address; (for example, V2, 1 becomes V1, 1).
2.
Multiply the 505 address by the number of bytes in the 505 variable;
(V1, 1 becomes V2, 1).
3.
Convert to “byte.bit” address; (V2, 1 becomes V2.0, 1).
4.
Substitute the 505 memory type for the corresponding S7 type;
(V2.0, 1 becomes DB256 DBX2.0, 1).
5.
Replace the 505 quantity with the S7 data type;
(DB256 DBX2.0, 1 becomes DB256 DBX2.0 WORD 1).
Figure A-1 shows a few additional examples of how to derive S7 addressing
to access 505 variables.
505 Variable
505 Variable
505 Variable
X4, 1
LSP4, 2
YP4, 8
Step 1.
X3, 1
LSP3, 2
YP3, 8
Step 2.
X3, 1
LSP12, 2
YP3, 8
Step 3.
X3.0, 1
LSP12.0, 2
YP0.3, 8
Step 4.
DB3 DBX3.0, 1
DB43 DBX12.0, 2
Q 0.3, 8
Step 5.
DB3 DBX3.0 BOOL 1
DB43 DBX12.0 DWORD 2
Q 0.3 BYTE 1
S7 Address
S7 Address
S7 Address
Figure A-1 SIMATIC 505 to S7 Addressing Examples
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-7
A.3
Mapping of FMS Variables onto 505 Memory
Simple Variables
Figure A-2 shows examples of how simple variables are mapped in
SIMATIC 505 V-memory.
Boolean
A Boolean is rounded up to an even byte length, but the extra bits are not transferred.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
X
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
*
Integer16
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X
Integer32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
Unsigned8
An Unsigned8 is rounded up to an even length, but the extra byte is not transferred.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X
13
14
15
16
*
Unsigned16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
14
15
16
14
15
16
X
Unsigned32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
Floating Point
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
Octet String5
An odd-length Octet String is treated as the next larger even-length Octet String.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bit String3
An odd-length Bit String is treated as the next larger even-length Bit String.
1
2
3
4
5
X
X
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X
X
Note: * represents bits or bytes skipped for alignment purposes. When the variable is read,
this data is not transmitted; when the variable is written, this data is written to the value 0.
X represents data values.
Figure A-2 Mapping of Simple Variables in 505 Memory
A-8
Reference Data
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Visible String51
A Visible String is preceded by two bytes which record the length of the string. The first byte is
the maximum length of the string, and the second is the actual length. When read from the 505,
the string transmitted is always of the maximum length with any unused characters sent as
spaces. All characters of the string must be printable ASCII characters. An odd-length Visible
String is rounded up to an even length, but the extra byte is not transferred.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
05
05
X
X
X
X
X
*
14
15
16
Time Difference1
Time Difference is stored as a 32-bit number.
Minimum: –24 Days 20 Hours 31 Minutes 23 Seconds 648 Milliseconds 8000 0000
Maximum: 24 Days 20 Hours 31 Minutes 23 Seconds 647 Milliseconds 7FFF FFFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
X
Time-of-day1
Time-of-day is stored as a 32-bit number.
Minimum: 00:00:00.000
0000 0000
Maximum: 23:59:59.999
0526 5BFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
Date1
Date values are stored as BCD numbers. The ranges are as follows:
Year
00 – 99
Month
01 – 12
Day
01 – 31
Hour
00 – 23
Minute
00 – 59
Second
00 – 59
Millisecond
000 – 999
Weekday
1–7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Year
8
9
10
11
12
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Millisecond
Weekday
Note: * represents bits or bytes skipped for alignment purposes. When the variable is read,
this data is not transmitted; when the variable is written, this data is written to the value 0.
X represents data values.
1The
FMS CP does not allow the use of this data type in the definition of a local variable; however,
data of this type can be transferred to and from a remote station if that station uses this data type.
Figure A-2 Mapping of Simple Variables in 505 Memory (continued)
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-9
Mapping of FMS Variables onto 505 Memory (continued)
Variable Arrays
Figure A-3 shows how variable arrays are mapped in SIMATIC 505 memory.
Array[10] of Boolean
An array of Boolean is rounded up to an even byte length, but the extra bits are not transferred.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
X8
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
*
*
*
*
*
*
15
16
X10 X9
Array[4] of Boolean
A Boolean array of 4 requires two bytes (one word), but the extra bits are not transferred.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
*
*
*
*
X4
X3
X2
X1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Array[2] of Integer16
1
2
3
4
X1
X2
Array[3] of Unsigned8
An odd-length array of Unsigned8 is rounded up to an even length, but the extra byte is not
transferred.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
X1
X2
X3
*
14
15
16
Array[2] of Octet String5
An odd-length Octet String is treated as the next larger even-length Octet String.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
Array[2] of Visible String51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
05
X1
05
X1
X1
X1
05
X1
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
*
05
*
Note: * represents bits or bytes skipped for alignment purposes. When the variable array is
read, this data is not transmitted; when the array is written, this data is written to the value 0.
X represents data values.
1The
FMS CP does not allow the use of this data type in the definition of a local variable; however,
data of this type can be transferred to and from a remote station if that station uses this data type.
Figure A-3 Mapping of Variable Arrays in 505 Memory
A-10
Reference Data
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Structures
Figure A-4 shows how an example structure of data types is mapped in
SIMATIC 505 memory.
STRUCT
{
Boolean
Boolean
Unsigned8
Unsigned8
Boolean
Integer16
Integer16
Integer32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned32
Floating Point
Octet String[6]
}
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(K)
(L)
(M)
Structure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*
*
*
*
*
*
B
A
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
*
*
*
E
C
D
*
*
*
*
F
G
H
I
*
J
K
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
Note: * represents bits or bytes skipped for alignment purposes. When the structure is read,
this data is not transmitted; when the structure is written, this data is written to the value 0.
X represents data values.
Octet String[5] and Octet String[6] behave identically. Both transfer 6 bytes on both read and
write.
Figure A-4 Mapping of a Structure in 505 Memory
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-11
Mapping of FMS Variables onto 505 Memory (continued)
Mapping of FMS
Status Response in
505 Memory
The FMS Status request function allows status information to be requested
from the communications partner on the specified FMS connection. The
following information is available in the response:
•
Logical status of the device (whether communication is possible)
•
Physical status of the device (device is operational, or maintenance is
required)
•
Local detail (vendor-specific information)
Figure A-5 shows how an FMS Status response is mapped in SIMATIC 505
memory.
FMS Status Response
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Logical Status
11
12
13
14
15
16
Physical Status
Length of Local Detail
Local Detail [0]
Local Detail [2]
Local Detail [1]
*
Note: * represents bytes skipped for alignment purposes.
Figure A-5 Mapping of FMS Status Response
Table A-3 provides information about the codes that the partner device can
supply as a response to an FMS Status request.
Table A-3 FMS Status Response Codes
Logical Status
A-12
Reference Data
Physical Status
Local Detail
00H – Ready for communication
10H – Operational
Vendor-specific
02H – Limited services
11H – Partly operational
—
—
12H – Not operational
—
—
13H – Maintenance required
—
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Mapping of FMS
Identify Response
in 505 Memory
The FMS Identify request function allows the following information to be
obtained from the partner device:
•
Name of the device vendor (vendor name)
•
Name or model number of the device
•
Revision (or version) of the device
Figure A-6 shows how an FMS Identify response is mapped in SIMATIC 505
memory. Each byte contains the Hex code that represents an ASCII
character, spelling out the vendor name and other device information.
FMS Identify Response
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Length of Vendor Name
Vendor Name [0]
Vendor Name [1]
Vendor Name [2]
Vendor Name [3]
...
Vendor Name [n]
*
Length of Model Number
Model Number [0]
Model Number [1]
Model Number [2]
Model Number [3]
...
Model Number [n]
*
Length of Revision
Revision [0]
Revision [1]
Revision [2]
Revision [3]
...
Revision [n]
*
Note: * represents bytes skipped for alignment purposes.
Figure A-6 Mapping of FMS Identify Response
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-13
A.4
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS)
Definition
The Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) provide
further information about the implementation of FMS (range and
complexity) on the FMS CP module.
This information is required for connections to systems of other
manufacturers.
Table A-4 PICS Part 1: Implementation in the System
System Parameters
Detail
Implementation vendor name
Siemens E & A
Implementation model name
Model number of the CPU
Implementation revision identifier
—
Vendor name of FMS
Siemens Energy & Automation
Controller type of FMS
ASPC2
Hardware release of FMS
A_._
Software release of FMS
V_._
Profile number
0
Calling FMS user (enter YES or NO)
YES
Called FMS user (enter YES or NO)
YES
Table A-5 PICS Part 2: Supported Services
Service
A-14
Reference Data
Primitive
Initiate
req, con, ind, rsp
Abort
req, ind
Reject
ind
Status
req, con
Unsolicited Status
Not supported
Identify
req, con
Read
req, con
Write
req, con
Information Report
ind
Get Object Dictionary (short version)
req, con
Get Object Dictionary (long version)
req, con
Read CRL Loc
req, con
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Table A-6 PICS Part 3: FMS Parameters and Options
FMS Parameters and Options
Detail
Addressing by name
YES
Maximum length for names
32
Access protection supported
—
Maximum length for extension
32
Maximum length for extension arguments
0
Table A-7 PICS Part 4: Local Implementation Values
Local Implementation Values
Detail
Maximum length of FMS PDU
241
Maximum number of services outstanding
calling (for SAC or SCC)
4
Maximum number of services outstanding
called (for RAC or RCC)
4
Syntax and semantics of the execution
argument
—
Syntax and semantics of extension
—
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Reference Data
A-15
A.5
FMS Connection Types and Variables
FMS Connection
Types and Possible
Job Types
When configuring FMS connections, you must specify the connection type.
Table A-8 shows which job types are available for data transfer with each
connection type.
Table A-8 FMS Connection Types and Jobs Allowed
Connection Type
MMAC – Master-master
on acyclic connection
Possible Job Types
Read, Write, and Report
possible in both
directions.
Client vs. Server
FMS Master
FMS Master
Read
Write
Report
Read
Write
Report
MSAC – Master-slave on
acyclic connection
Read, Write, and Report
possible for the FMS
master.
FMS Master
FMS Slave
Read
Write
Report
MSAC_SI – Master-slave
on acyclic connection
with slave initiative
Read, Write, and Report
possible for the FMS
master.
The FMS slave can also
report once the master
has assigned the
appropriate rights.
MSCY – Master-slave on
cyclic connection
Read, Write, and Report
possible for the FMS
master.
FMS Master
FMS Slave
Read
Write
Report
Report
FMS Master
FMS Slave
Read
Write
Report
Legend:
A-16
Reference Data
Confirmed service
Client function
Unconfirmed service
Server function
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Configuring
Read/Write Access
to Variables
You can enable and disable read or write access to each variable in your
configuration. The Access Rights dialog in the FMS Variable input pane
allows you to specify read or write access by password, by groups, or by all.
The effects of these choices with passwords are shown in Table A-9.
Table A-9 Read/Write Access to Variables with Password
Read Access
Write Access
Password
n
n
0
Read and write access are
permitted.
n
—
0
Only read access is permitted.
—
n
0
Only write access is permitted.
n
n
>0
Read and write access are
permitted with a password.
n
—
>0
Only read access with password is
permitted.
—
n
>0
Only write access with password
is permitted.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Result
Reference Data
A-17
A.6
Local LSAP Assignments
Table A-10 lists the available LSAP assignment numbers and any
restrictions that may apply.
Table A-10 Local LSAP Assignments
LSAP
Conditions
0, 1
Reserved
2 to 33
Available for FDL connections
2 to 52
Available for FMS connections
53
Cannot be used if Peer Blocks are defined
54 to 57
Available for FMS connections
58
Restricted to FMS slave connections
59 to 62
Available for FMS connections
63 to FF
Reserved
NOTE: Ordinarily, the FMS CP module cannot repeat local LSAP numbers.
Each connection must have a unique local LSAP number. The exception to
this is FMS slave connections. All FMS slave connections must use LSAP
58. LSAP 58 cannot be used for connections to any other type of device.
A-18
Reference Data
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Appendix B
Troubleshooting
B.1
Using the RESET Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B.2
Job Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
Job Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locally Detected Errors in FMS Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Errors Signaled by the FMS Partner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send-Receive Job Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
B-3
B-5
B-6
CP-to-Controller Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7
B.3
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Troubleshooting
B-1
B.1
Using the RESET Button
First attempt to reset the module using the COM5434 Configurator
software before resetting the module with the RESET button. If resetting
the module using the COM5434 Configurator does not solve the problem,
make sure to check all connections, communication cables, and the
configuration of the FMS CP in the base using TISOFT.
However, if there is a serious hardware error, the module resets due to a
signal from the watchdog timer, encounters the same problem again, and
repeats the reset over and over. If this occurs, call the Siemens Technical
Services Group for technical assistance. You may be advised to return the
module to the factory for repair.
B-2
Troubleshooting
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
B.2
Job Status Codes
Job Status Codes
Table B-1 lists the status codes and their meanings for FMS or
Send-Receive jobs.
Table B-1 FMS or Send-Receive Job Status
Error
Locally Detected
Errors in FMS Jobs
Description
0000
Job executed successfully; no errors.
D000
Job not yet triggered by WY bit (Note: code appears in Job Status
screen only, not in V memory status word.)
D001
More data received than expected, data written to PLC.
D002
Less data received than expected, data written to PLC.
Table B-2 lists the error code numbers and their meanings for FMS jobs.
Table B-2 Local FMS Job Status Codes
Error
Description
0001
Communications problem.
0002
Function cannot be executed: either negative acknowledgment by
the CP or error in the sequence.
0003
The connection is not configured (invalid ID specified). If the
connection is configured, the error indicates that the permitted
parallel job processing limit has been exceeded. For example, SAC=0
is configured and a Report job is sent.
0004
The receive data area is too short or the data types do not match.
0005
A reset request has been received from the CP.
0006
The corresponding job execution on the CP is in the Disabled state,
or a reset request has been received from the CP; the transfer is
therefore incomplete.
0007
The corresponding job execution on the CP is in the wrong state.
With Report: error is specified in greater detail in diagnostic buffer.
0008
Job execution on the CP signals an error accessing the user memory.
000A
Access to the local user memory is not possible (for example, the DB
has been deleted).
000B
Warning: the job is already active.
0014
Not enough work or load memory available.
0200
Unspecified application reference error.
0201
The configured connection cannot be established at present; for
example, the LAN connection is not established.
0300
Unspecified definition error.
0301
Object with requested index/name is not defined.
0302
Object attributes are inconsistent.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Troubleshooting
B-3
Job Status Codes (continued)
Table B-2 Local FMS Job Status Codes (continued)
Error
B-4
Troubleshooting
Description
0303
Name already exists.
0400
Unspecified resource error.
0401
No memory available.
0500
Unspecified service error.
0501
Conflict due to object status.
0502
Configured PDU size exceeded.
0503
Conflict due to object restrictions.
0504
Inconsistent parameters.
0505
Illegal parameters.
0600
Unspecified access error.
0601
Invalid object; cable off; bad bus parameter; or partner CP in reset.
0602
Hardware error.
0603
Object access was denied.
0604
Invalid address.
0605
Inconsistent object attributes.
0606
Object access not supported.
0607
Variable read or written does not exist on server.
0608
Type conflict (source data too large or too small for variable).
0609
Access using names not supported.
0700
Unspecified object dictionary error.
0701
Permitted name length exceeded.
0702
Overflow of the object dictionary.
0703
Object dictionary is write-protected.
0704
Overflow of the extension length.
0705
Overflow of the object description length.
0706
Processing problem.
0100
Unspecified VFD status error.
0102
Bad FMS–PDU.
0105
PDU length error: variable is too long; see Table C-1.
0106
Service not supported.
0108
RCC/SAC/RAC error.
0800
Unspecified error.
EF02
You have attempted to run more than one FMS job simultaneously
on a single FMS connection. This means not enough resources are
available. You can correct the problem by setting the parameter
“Max Cnfmd Svc To” for the client and “Max Cnfmd Svc From” for
the server to the number of jobs sharing the connection. If the jobs
are not run simultaneously, then the default value of 1 is acceptable.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Errors Signaled by
the FMS Partner
Table B-3 lists FMS job error codes signaled by the communication partner.
Table B-3 Errors Signaled by the FMS Partner
Error
Description
8200
Unspecified application reference error.
8201
Application (for example, user program) not obtainable.
8300
Unspecified definition error.
8301
Object with requested index/name is not defined.
8302
Object attributes are inconsistent.
8303
Name exists already.
8400
Unspecified resource error.
8401
No memory available.
8402
Not allowed in current state; check Maximum Confirmed Service To
and Maximum Confirmed Service From parameters.
8500
Unspecified service error.
8501
Conflict due to object status.
8502
Configured PDU size exceeded.
8503
Conflict due to object restrictions.
8504
Inconsistent parameters.
8505
Illegal parameters.
8600
Unspecified access error.
8601
Invalid object.
8602
Hardware error.
8603
Object access was denied.
8604
Invalid address.
8605
Inconsistent object attributes.
8606
Object access is not supported.
8607
Object does not exist.
8608
Type conflict.
8609
Access using names is not supported.
8700
Unspecified object dictionary (OD) error.
8701
Permitted name length exceeded.
8702
Overflow of the object dictionary.
8703
Object dictionary is write-protected.
8704
Overflow of the extension length.
8705
Overflow of the object description length.
8706
Processing problem.
8100
Unspecified VFD status error.
8104
Too much data transferred on Write.
8000
Unspecified error detected by partner.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Troubleshooting
B-5
Job Status Codes (continued)
Send-Receive Job
Error Codes
Table B-4 lists the error codes and their meanings for Send-Receive jobs.
Table B-4 Send-Receive Job Error Codes
B-6
Troubleshooting
Error
Description
E0E0
Receive Job: no data available. This error occurs when a Receive job
is executed but no corresponding Send job has occurred.
E0E1
Connection is not configured by CP.
E0E2
No LAN connection to remote.
E0E3
Invalid request.
E0E4
S7–Read/Write buffer too small.
E0E5
DS–Number out of range 1..64, 1..32.
E0E6
S7–Prot–error
E0E8
L2: remote LSAP is not active.
E0E9
Send Job: no remote receive resources. This error occurs when 2 or
more Send jobs are executed but no corresponding Receive jobs have
occurred.
E0EA
L2: service on remote LSAP rejected.
E0EB
L2: remote address not available.
E0EC
L2: bus fault.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
B.3
CP-to-Controller Status Codes
Table B-5 CP-to-Attached Controller Error Codes for FMS and Send-Receive Jobs
Status
Code (Hex)
Description
80xx
xx is task code error response from attached PLC; see PLC documentation. These errors
usually indicate a problem in accessing data in the attached PLC caused by a firmware error in
the CP rather than a user error.
9000
Invalid request to PLC; a firmware error in the CP rather than a user error.
9001
Memory type request from PLC is not defined for any 505 PLC. The Configurator guards
against the use of undefined data types when configuring communications between 505 PLCs,
so this should not occur. If the accessed plcTT type is unsupported or not configured in the
attached PLC, error code 9003 occurs (see below).
9002
Reserved for invalid request for PLC mode. Currently, CP does not produce this error.
9003
Memory type requested from PLC is not supported or not configured. For example, the 560
does not support loop data types. It also occurs if the requested data type is not configured in
the PLC (e.g., unconfigured analog alarm data types). Access of data types undefined for any
505 PLC results in error 9001.
9004
Starting memory address accessed in PLC is invalid. This occurs if memory type is defined,
supported, and configured, but the starting address is out of range for the data type. For
example, if the starting address is V27000 and only 52K bytes of V-memory are configured
(allowing a maximum V-address of 26624), then this error occurs. If you reconfigured the PLC
memory after installing and initializing the CP module, reset the CP module so that it can read
the new memory configuration in the PLC.
9005
Memory type cannot be written since it is read-only.
9006
PLC communication time-out. Due to extremely heavy load on the PLC or CP, the data access
to the PLC took longer than expected. This error may also occur if the CP resides in a remote
base and the I/O cable becomes disconnected. If this error occurs, retry the job.
9007
Starting memory address OK, but the number of items requested is causing invalid memory
access. For example, this error ocuurs if 2000 words of V-memory starting at V26000 are
requested but only 52K bytes of V-memory are configured (V26624 is highest configured
address). If you reconfigured PLC memory after installing and initializing the CP module, reset
the CP module so that it can read the new memory configuration in the PLC.
9008
Slot into which CP module is placed is not configured. This error does not explicitly appear for
any job. It may be indicated on the job diagnostic display by the message “Waiting for WY bit to
trigger Job”, with a job status D000, even when the PLC is setting the WY bit. If the base is not
configured, the module is unable to detect the WY Job Start Bits required for the jobs.
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Troubleshooting
B-7
Appendix C
Specifications
Table C-1 Communication Capacities
Communication Type
Maximum Number or Size
FMS Connections
32
FDL Connections
32
S7 Connections
48
Total number of connections
59 (or 60 if Peerlink service is not used)
FMS variable size
Maximum PDU size = 241 bytes
237 bytes for Read jobs (241 – 4 bytes)
≤234 bytes for Write and Information Report jobs,
depending on name length, index or subindex (see
Table C-2)
Send-Receive data size
240 bytes
Peerlink data transfer size
234 bytes
Table C-2 provides a formula for calculating the maximum size of an FMS
variable that can be transmitted. The maximum PDU size for an FMS job is
241 bytes. For Write and Information Report jobs, the PDU includes the
addressing information, which must then be subtracted from 241 bytes to
determine the maximum amount of data that can be specified in the
variable.
Table C-2 Calculating Variable Length
Access Using...
Write or Information Report
Index
8 bytes
Subindex
10 bytes
Name
x + name length (number of characters)
x = 7 for name length ≥ 15
x = 6 for name length < 15
Example: For a variable named “PumpControl” (name length = 11), which
is less than 15 characters, add 6 to the name length and subtract from 241,
as shown below:
241 – (x + name length)
241 – (6 + 11)
241 – 17 = 224 bytes of user data
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Specifications
C-1
Table C-3 Specifications
Operating temperature
0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
(Based on the immediate surrounding
air at the device.)
Storage temperature
–40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)
Shock
IEC 68-2-27; Test Ea; half sine, 15 g, 11 ms
Pollution degree
2, IEC 664, 664A
Noise immunity, conducted
IEC 801, Part 4, Level 3
MIL STD 461B, Part 4 CS01, CS02, CS06
IEC 255-4, Appendix E
NEMA DC33
NEMA ICS 2–230.45
IEC 255
Noise immunity, radiated
IEC 801 Part 3, Level 3
MIL STD 461B, Part 4 RS01, RS02
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 801, Part 2, Level 4, (15 kV)
Minimum torque for bezel screws
2.6 in-lb (0.3 N-m)
Maximum torque for bezel screws
4.12 in-lb (0.6 N-m)
Module power required from base
5.0 W of +5 V
0.2 W of –5 V
Relative humidity
5% to 95% noncondensing
Vibration
Sinusoidal
IEC 68-2-6, Test Fc
0.15 mm peak-to-peak, 10–57 Hz;
1.0 g, 57–150 Hz
Random
IEC 68-2-34, Test Fdc,
equivalent to NAVMAT P–9492
0.04 g2/Hz, 80–350 Hz
Corrosion protection
All parts of corrosion-resistant material or plated or painted as corrosion
protection
Agency approvals
Underwriters Laboratories: UL Listed (Industrial Control Equipment)
Canadian Standards Association: CSA Certified (Process Control Equipment)
Factory Mutual Approved; Class I, Div. 2 Hazardous Locations
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (VDE) 0160 Electrical Equipment
(self-compliance)
EN61131-2 (1995) Programmable Controllers Equipment requirements and test
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
C-2
Specifications
SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS CP User Manual
Index
A
Access groups, 5-22, 5-39
Access rights, 5-38
Active stations status, 7-3
Addressing, network, 4-7
Communication, between PLC and FMS CP,
4-4–4-6
Communication services, 4-2–4-6
Configuration tasks, 6-3
Configuring I/O address, in PLC, 2-10–2-11
Connection types, A-16
CP status, 7-2
Agency approvals, xiv, C-2
D
Arrays
examples, A-10
number of elements, 5-39
Data element list, A-2–A-5
Assistance, technical, xiv
Data types, creating, 5-33–5-35
Description, for configuration, 5-12
Descriptor ID, peer block, 5-17
B
Base, powering up, 2-8–2-9
Baud rate
selecting for local module, 5-14
setting RS-232 port, 2-4
Bezel, features, 1-4–1-5
Diagnostics, 7-2–7-8
Downloading
configuration, 5-42–5-43
FMS Read configuration example, 6-9
FMS Variable configuration example, 6-12
Peerlink configuration example, 6-39
Receive configuration example, 6-21
Send configuration example, 6-19
Drag-and-drop operations, 5-9
Bus connectors, installing, 3-12–3-14
Bus parameter profile, 5-14
C
Cable
programming, 2-6
routing, 3-5–3-6
Capacities, communication, C-1
COM5434 configurator software
features and functions, 5-6–5-11
installing, 5-2
starting, 5-3
E
Electrostatic discharge, handling requirements,
2-3
Error codes
CP to controller status, B-7
FMS and Send-Receive jobs, B-3–B-6
Send-Receive jobs, B-6
Examples
FMS Read job, 6-4–6-13
ladder logic for FMS read job, 6-13
ladder logic for Receive job, 6-25
ladder logic for Send job, 6-23
Peerlink services, 6-28–6-39
Send-Receive job, 6-14–6-27
Index-1
F
Index, specifying, 5-29, 5-37
Indicators, status LEDs, 1-4, 2-8–2-9
FDL connection, status, 7-6
FDL services
configuring Send-Receive jobs, 5-30–5-32
defining connections, 5-23–5-25
definition, 4-2
Features
bezel, 1-4–1-5
functional, 1-2
Information report
FMS job type, 4-8–4-10
selecting FMS job type, 5-29
Installation overview, 2-2–2-3
Installing
COM5434 configurator software, 5-2
FMS CP module, 2-5
FMS connection, status, 7-5
FMS connection types, A-16
FMS data types, creating, 5-33–5-35
J
FMS Read job example, 6-4–6-13
Job start/job active bits, 4-4–4-6
FMS services
configuring jobs, 5-27–5-29
defining connections, 5-19–5-22
definition, 4-2
overview, 4-8–4-10
Job status, 7-7
FMS variables
creating, 5-36–5-40
mapping in 505 memory, A-8–A-13
Jumper, setting baud rate, 2-4
FMS-DP Universal, bus profile, 5-14
G
Gap factor, 5-15
Group numbers
definition, 4-10
selecting, 5-22, 5-39
Job types
definition, 4-8–4-10
selecting FMS, 5-29
selecting send-receive, 5-32
L
Ladder logic
for FMS read example, 6-13
for Receive example, 6-25
for Send example, 6-23
LEDs, status, 1-4, 2-8–2-9
Link Service Access Point (LSAP), 4-7
Local LSAP assignments, A-18
H
Hardware overview, 1-4–1-5
Local station address, 5-13
Logical view of a network, 1-10
Highest station address (HSA), 5-14
M
I
Manuals, related, xiii
I/O address configuration, 2-10–2-11
Masters and slaves, 1-7
Identify
FMS job type, 4-8–4-10
response, A-13
selecting FMS job type, 5-29
Memory type and address, 5-18, 5-29, 5-32, 5-38
Index-2
Menu commands, 5-8–5-10
Module local configuration, defining, 5-13–5-15
Network addressing, 4-7
PROFIBUS-FMS port
connecting, 2-7
description, 1-5
Networking overview, 1-6–1-10
Programming cable, 2-6
N
Programming device, connecting, 2-6
O
Object dictionary
definition, 4-8
selecting, 5-22
OSI 7 layer model, 1-7
P
Password
definition, 4-10
for FMS connection, 5-21
for FMS variable, 5-39
PC-to-FMS CP communications, configuring
port setup, 5-3–5-6
Peer block status, 7-8
Peerlink II services
defining, 5-16–5-18
definition, 4-2
overview, 4-12
Peerlink services example, 6-28–6-39
Port
PC serial port setup, 5-3–5-5
PROFIBUS card setup, 5-4–5-5
Powering up base, 2-8–2-9
Protocol Implementation Conformance
Statements (PICS), A-14–A-15
R
Read
FMS job type, 4-8–4-10
selecting FMS job type, 5-29
Receive, peer blocks, 4-12, 5-16–5-18
Related manuals, xiii
Relay ladder logic
for FMS read example, 6-13
for Receive example, 6-25
for Send example, 6-23
Remote station address, 5-21
Requester, FMS services, 5-22
Reset button, 1-5, B-2
Responder, FMS services, 5-22
Right mouse button menus, 5-11
RS-232 port
description, 1-5
setting baud rate, 2-4
Run/Stop switch, 1-5
Printing. 5-42
Priority factor, peer block, 5-16
PROFIBUS
bus connector schematics, 3-11
bus connectors, 3-3
installing, 3-12–3-14
cable, 3-2, 3-8
card communications setup, 5-4–5-5
cards, 1-2
installing cables, 3-7–3-13
repeater, 3-4
standards, 1-2, 1-6
statistics/status, 7-4
user organization, xiv
S
S7 services supported, 4-13
S7/505 data types, A-2–A-5
Saving
configuration, 5-41
FMS Read configuration example, 6-9
FMS Variable configuration example, 6-12
Peerlink configuration example, 6-33, 6-39
Receive configuration example, 6-21
Send configuration example, 6-19
Screen features, 5-7
Index-3
Send-Receive, configuring jobs, 5-30–5-32
Send-Receive services, overview, 4-11
Token
passing, 1-8
ring, 1-8
rotation, 5-15
Serial port setup, 5-3–5-5
Toolbar buttons, 5-10
SIMATIC 505 addressing, A-6–A-7
Transmit, peer blocks, 4-12, 5-16–5-18
Send-Receive job example, 6-14–6-27
SIMATIC S7 addressing, A-6–A-7
Specifications, FMS CP module, C-2
Standard, bus profile, 5-14
Transmit interval, peer block, 5-16
Troubleshooting, B-2–B-7
Standard-Mixed, bus profile, 5-14
Start bit, 5-28, 5-31
Starting, the COM5434 software, 5-3
Status
FMS job type, 4-8–4-10
response, A-12
selecting FMS job type, 5-29
Status LEDs, 1-4, 2-8–2-9
Status word, assigning, 5-29, 5-32
Structures, A-11
Subindex, specifying, 5-29, 5-40
U
User data types, creating, 5-33–5-35
V
Validating the configuration, 5-41
Variable arrays
examples, A-10
selecting data type, 5-39
Variables, creating, 5-36–5-40
T
Virtual Field Device (VFD), 5-5
Technical assistance, xiv
Termination and bias, 3-10
Timing, for Send and Receive jobs, 6-26, 6-27
TISOFT, using for I/O address configuration,
2-10–2-11
Title of configuration, entering, 5-12
Index-4
W
Write
FMS job type, 4-8–4-10
selecting FMS job type, 5-29
Customer Response
We would like to know what you think about our user manuals so that we can serve you better.
How would you rate the quality of our manuals?
Excellent
Good
Fair
Poor
Accuracy
Organization
Clarity
Completeness
Graphics
Examples
Overall design
Size
Index
Would you be interested in giving us more detailed comments about our manuals?
Yes! Please send me a questionnaire.
No. Thanks anyway.
Your Name:
Title:
Telephone Number:
(
)
Company Name:
Company Address:
Manual Name:
PROFIBUS-FMS Communications Processor User Manual
Text Assembly Number:
Order Number:
2807479-0001
PPX:505–8129–1
Edition:
Date:
Original
12/97
FOLD
SIEMENS ENERGY & AUTOMATION INC
3000 BILL GARLAND ROAD
PO BOX 1255
JOHNSON CITY TN 37605–1255
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO.3
JOHNSON CITY, TN
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
ATTN TECHNICAL COMMUNICATIONS M/S 519
SIEMENS ENERGY & AUTOMATION INC
PO BOX 1255
JOHNSON CITY TN 37605–1255
FOLD